JP2015211835A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing erroneous operation.SOLUTION: Information group selection means selects one information group used for control by control means from storage means. Top position designation means indicates a top position of a predetermined information group in a storage area in which a plurality of information groups are stored, and the information group selection means selects the one information group, based on the top position indicated by the top position designation means. Thus, in control processing for designating the one information group, the top position of the predetermined information group only needs to be read, and a program needs not to individually describe information for constituting information groups. As a result, when the program is diverted to other models, a number of pieces of information need not to be rewritten on the program, and hence occurrence of a rewrite error of a value can be suppressed. Therefore, an effect of suppressing malfunction of a game machine is achieved.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery performed based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening is a win. In such a gaming machine, whether or not to shift to the hit state is determined based on information stored in a predetermined range of the storage means.

JP 2001-276365 A

  However, in such a gaming machine, there is a possibility that the storage address of data stored in the storage means, the number of stored data, and the like differ depending on the model. Therefore, when a control program used in one model is applied to another model, it is necessary for the program designer to redefine the program according to the specifications of the model to be applied. For this reason, if an incorrect value is defined in the control program due to a designer's mistake, the gaming machine may malfunction.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress malfunction.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is configured by control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, and information constituted by one or more pieces of information for the control means to perform control. A storage unit that stores a plurality of groups, an information group selection unit that selects one information group used for control by the control unit from the storage unit, and a storage area in which the plurality of information groups are stored, And a head position designation unit indicating a head position of a predetermined information group, wherein the information group selection unit selects the one information group based on the head position indicated by the head position designation unit.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage unit, the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position specifying unit. Next to the designation means indicating the head position of the information group stored next to the head position of the predetermined information group indicated by the head position designation means and the predetermined information group indicated by the designation means Information number calculating means for calculating the number of pieces of information constituting the predetermined information group from the head position of the stored information group, wherein the information group selecting means is a head specified by the head position specifying means. One information group is selected from the position and the number of information calculated by the information number calculating means.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein the storage means includes a plurality of addresses capable of storing information, and the plurality of addresses includes the plurality of addresses. Each information constituting the information group is stored one by one.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a plurality of information groups composed of one or more pieces of information for the control means to perform control are stored in the storage means, and 1 is used for control by the control means from the storage means. Are selected by the information group selection means. Among the storage areas in which a plurality of information groups are stored, the start position of the predetermined information group is indicated by the start position specifying means, and based on the start position indicated by the start position specifying means, the information group selecting means One information group is selected.

  As a result, in the control processing for designating one information group, it is only necessary to read the head position of the predetermined information group, and there is no need to individually describe the information constituting the information group in the program. Therefore, when diverting a program to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large amount of information on the program, so that it is possible to prevent a value rewriting error from occurring. Therefore, there is an effect that malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effect is achieved. That is, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the designation position indicates the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designation means. Based on the start position of the predetermined information group indicated by the start position specifying means and the start position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the specifying means, the information number calculating means The number of pieces of information to be configured is calculated. One information group is selected by the information group selecting means from the starting position specified by the starting position specifying means and the number of information calculated by the information number calculating means.

  Thereby, in the program, it is not necessary to specify the number of information constituting the information group numerically. Therefore, the information group is configured when the program is diverted to another model having a different number of information constituting the information group. In the process using the number, the step of rewriting the number can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a correction error of the program creator.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the following effect is produced. In other words, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses at which information can be stored. Each piece of information constituting a plurality of information groups is stored one by one at the plurality of addresses.

  As a result, the number of addresses in which information is stored matches the number of information in the information group, so the number of information can be easily calculated by the information number calculation means based on the range of addresses in which information is stored. There is an effect that can be calculated.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in a main controller, (b) shows typically the correspondence between the 1st hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C3 and the winning in the normal symbol. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation | variation classification selection table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the winning setting table. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for special figure 1 removal, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for special figure 2 removal. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the offset setting table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the game result setting table typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the state setting table, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the example of the description content of the state setting table in an actual program. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content of the clear table at the time of jackpot completion typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the various setting value storage area. It is the schematic diagram which showed the structure of the register typically. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining a power-on image. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B. FIG. (A)-(c) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface C. FIG. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot determination processing performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit time setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the game result setting value acquisition process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process at the time of a loss performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the zero setting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the round number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back surface image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st per random number table for low probability in the modification of 1st Embodiment, (b) is the high probability in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number table for time. In the modification of 1st Embodiment, it is the schematic diagram which showed typically the example of the description content of the 1st per random number table in an actual program. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU of the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot determination processing 2 performed by MPU of the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the offset setting table of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process performed by MPU of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the failure time setting process 2 performed by MPU of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of ROM in the main controller in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the big hit in the 1st type counter C2 and special symbol in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence with a classification. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation classification selection table in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for latent times in 3rd Embodiment, (b), (c) is the content of the selection table for promotion periods in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure shown typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the selection table for promotion periods in 3rd Embodiment, (b), (c) is the selection table for the end of the promotion period in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed the content typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the offset setting table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the selection table at the time of disconnection in 3rd Embodiment. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the case where a rank up fails by the rank up effect performed after completion | finish of jackpot in 3rd Embodiment. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the case where it ranks up from rank D to rank C by the rank-up effect performed after completion | finish of jackpot in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the case where it ranks up from rank C to rank B by the rank-up effect performed after completion | finish of jackpot in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case where it ranks up from rank B to rank A by the rank improvement effect performed after the end of jackpot. It is explanatory drawing explaining the case where it ranks up from rank A to rank S by the rank improvement effect performed after the end of jackpot in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the case where it alert | reports that it ranks up to the maximum rank within a rank-up period by the rank-up effect performed after completion | finish of jackpot in 3rd Embodiment, (b). It is explanatory drawing explaining the case where it alert | reports that it was not able to be ranked up to a maximum rank within a rank-up period by the rank-up effect performed after the end of jackpot in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot determination process performed by MPU of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the big hit time setting process 2 performed by MPU of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the failure time setting process 3 performed by MPU of the main controller in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the variation classification selection table in the modification of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the selection table for non-probability hits in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the content typically, (c) is the figure which showed typically the content of the selection table for probability variation in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically the content of the selection table at the time of disconnection in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot determination processing performed by MPU of the main controller in the modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process 4 at the time of a loss performed by MPU of the main controller in the modification of 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, or changing the effect of Super Reach. Operated.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Various effects such as a variation effect and a reach effect that are performed in accordance with the entry (start winning prize) to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b described later are themes given to the respective stages. It is designed to be performed according to. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during high-speed fluctuation, and every time the frame button 22 is operated, the “city stage” → “empty stage” "→" Island Stage "→" City Stage "→ ... Further, immediately after the power is turned on, the “city street stage” is set as the initial stage.

  On the other hand, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen for a super reach effect mode during normal reach when the normal reach effect is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the contents of the effect at the time of super reach are changed.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64 a, the second ball entrance 64 b, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64a, the second winning port 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, 13 is fixed from the front side with a wood screw or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, a special symbol (first design) is drawn, and the ball passes through the normal entrance 67. In this case, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the case of being made, the jackpot type is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) It is opened and the opening is repeated several times. As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are four types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack D”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player. Although details will be described later, for example, when the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, after the jackpot, the game value that the short time state of the normal symbol continues until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times is given. When the jackpot type is “jackpot B”, a gaming value of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol after the jackpot ends is given.

  In addition, when the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds to 30 seconds) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b while the variable display is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is suspended up to 4 times, The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b remains, the next special symbol will be drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Note that the specific winning opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 enters the special gaming state is provided immediately below the first entrance 64a. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so that many balls also enter the first winning opening 64a. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64a is maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When hitting the normal symbol, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is released for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. It becomes a state. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 64b, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to a maximum of four times, and the number of retained balls is retained by the first symbol display device 37. In addition to being displayed, it is also shown in the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  As described above, there are four types of jackpot types for special symbols: “Big Jack A” to “Big Jack D”.

  When “ordinary jackpot” is reached, a special gaming state with 16 rounds (16 round jackpot) is entered, but no added value is given after the jackpot ends. That is, after the jackpot ends, the special symbol shifts to a low probability state and does not shift to the “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state).

  When the jackpot A (short-term jackpot) is reached, the number of rounds becomes a special game state with eight rounds (8 rounds jackpot). ) Specifically, the probability of winning a normal symbol increases after the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. In the present embodiment, the period in which the short time state of the normal symbol continues is defined by the number of lotteries for the special symbol, but may be defined by the number of times the variation of the special symbol is completed, for example.

  In addition, if you win a “big hit B (probable big jackpot)”, “big hit C (latent probability big jackpot)” or “big hit D (rare latent big jackpot)”, all of them are in a special game state with 8 rounds (8 rounds After that, it shifts to the “high probability state of special symbol” as added value after the end of the jackpot. In addition, when winning “big hit B (probability change big win)”, the player is informed that the game has shifted to the “high probability state of special symbol”, but “big hit C (latency probability change big hit)”, Or, the “big hit D (rare latency probability change big hit)” is not notified. Therefore, even if it is not notified that the transition to the “high probability state of the special symbol” is made, it is possible to give the player a “big hit C (latency probability variation big hit)” or “big hit D (rare latent probability variation big hit)”. Can be expected to have won. That is, it can be expected that the state is a “high probability state of special symbol”.

  In addition, when winning the jackpot C (latency probability change jackpot), it is selected when the contents of the fluctuating effect selected when the jackpot is notified or when the special symbol is missed after the jackpot ends. The display content of the fluctuation pattern effect is the same as “big hit A (short-term big hit)”. In other words, it is difficult to determine whether “big hit A (short-term big hit)” or “big hit C (latency probability variation big hit)” is won. On the other hand, if you win the jackpot D (rare latent probability variation jackpot), you will be notified of the jackpot compared to the case where you win the jackpot A (short-term jackpot) or jackpot B (latency probability variation jackpot) At the time, when a special symbol losing is notified after the end of the jackpot, a variation pattern effect having a high expectation is easily selected. Therefore, even if it is not informed that the transition to the “high probability state of the special symbol” is made, it is possible to select “big hit D (rare latency probability big hit)” by selecting a variation pattern effect with a high expectation. It can be expected that the player has won, and the player's interest in games can be improved.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol high probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, a special gaming state (a jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which has a lower probability of jackpot than the probability variation state of a special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of a special symbol is normal. Indicates the state (normal state of special symbol). The “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time-short state) means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol short-time state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state”, which indicates that the normal symbol hit probability is normal, that is, the hit probability is lower than during short-time. .

  After that, after the special symbol jackpot ends, the period when the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state of the normal symbol, that is, from the end of the “big jackpot A” until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Is referred to as a short time period of ordinary symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases even during a special symbol change. As mentioned above, in the case of “big hit A”, the probability of winning the normal symbol was limited until the special symbol lottery was completed 100 times. Then, until the next jackpot is won, the normal symbol hit probability is maintained in an up state. That is, when winning from “big hit B” to “big hit D”, it is possible to wait for the next big hit without reducing the number of possessions, which is an advantageous big win for the player. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with various game states such as a jackpot state, a short time state of a normal symbol, a probable change state of a special symbol, and the interest of the player is improved. Yes.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “big hit A” is won, the short time period of the normal symbol is 100 times, but this is not a limitation. For example, 20 times or 150 times may be selected as a short time period of a normal symbol. Further, instead of the number of times of drawing a special symbol, the normal symbol time-saving state may be continued until a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 5 minutes) elapses. In addition, instead of setting the “normal symbol time-short state”, the time required to open the electric accessory (not shown) associated with the second entrance 64b is lengthened, or the electric character is played once per normal symbol. You may increase the number of times you open things. Further, the number of rounds and the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a are not limited to the aspect of the present embodiment. For example, a big hit of 4 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds may be provided. As a closing condition of the winning opening (large opening opening) 65a, for example, a condition “until 3 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won” or “until 10 seconds have passed or 5 balls have been won. A jackpot of the condition “until” may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot is over, it is configured to shift to either the “high probability state of the special symbol” or the “short time state of the normal symbol”, but the jackpot ends. Until the end of the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times), the “special symbol high probability state” is configured, and after the predetermined number of special symbol lottery ends, While shifting to the “special symbol low probability state”, the “normal symbol time-short state” or the “normal symbol normal state” may be adopted.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the added value given to the player after the jackpot is shared is common regardless of the gaming state when the jackpot is won, but the game after the jackpot ends depending on the gaming state when the jackpot is won. The added value given to the person may be different. For example, if you win the “big hit A” during the normal symbol time-saving state, the normal symbol time-saving period is 100 times, and if you win the “big hit A” during the normal symbol normal state, The period may be 50 times.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate by lighting whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with the entry (start winning prize) to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is being executed. As a stop symbol after the end of variation, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or the first entrance 64a or the second entrance The number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the mouth 64b, is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of times is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is configured to be suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of suspensions is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Moreover, you may comprise so that the entrance to the 1st entrance 64a and the entrance to the 2nd entrance 64b may be suspended up to 4 times, respectively. In addition, when the change is executed according to the holding ball, the change may be executed in the order in which the balls are entered without considering the type of the entrance, and when there is a holding ball, the second Entry into the entrance 64b may be executed with priority. Also, the winning probability of jackpot and the selection ratio of each jackpot type may be changed between the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b.

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type ("big hit A" to "big hit D") ) In accordance with the special symbol (first symbol).

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (start winning prize), a special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. Executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, and FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is any one of “Big jackpot A”, “Big jackpot C”, and “Big jackpot D”, the main symbol to which the even number “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” is added. Is displayed. If “big hit B” is selected, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers “1, 3, 5, 7, 9” are added are arranged. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to recognize the jackpot type only by confirming the main symbols that are aligned.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the upper 4/5 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed. The lower 1/5 is a secondary display area Ds for displaying the number of balls held.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform the variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally long below the main display area Dm. In this sub-display area Ds, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not yet been changed (holding balls) among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, is displayed. The

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. When a ball enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b while the variable display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the entrance The number of times is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the sub display area Ds. In the sub display area Ds, one reserved ball number symbol is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed in accordance with the number of displayed retained ball number symbols. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the number of reserved balls is Indicates four balls. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the sub display area Ds, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the entrance to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the sub-display area Ds, the reserved ball number is different in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the four divided areas are different by the number of reserved balls. You may make it display in a mode (for example, a color and a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display by indicating whether or not a normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 is being executed, As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time a ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol and the symbol “×” are alternately turned on. Display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b operates for a predetermined time. As a result, it is configured such that a ball easily enters the second entrance 64b. The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol holding lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the sphere at the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64a and the second entrance 64b. Or you may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) 5 times or more. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first entrance 64a through which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64a, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Further, the first entrance 64a is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A second entrance 64b through which a sphere can enter is disposed below the first entrance 64a. When a ball enters the second entrance 64b, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 draws a special symbol, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37 a of the first symbol display device 37. Similarly to the first entrance 64a, the second entrance 64b is also one of the entrances through which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. Since the upper side of the second entrance 64b is shielded by the first entrance 64a, it is difficult to enter the sphere normally. As described above, when the normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is released, and the ball enters the second entrance 64b easily. In other words, it is configured so that a ball can easily enter the second entrance 64b during the probability change of a special symbol that is likely to be a normal symbol, or during a short time period of a normal symbol.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second ball entrance 64b, and a horizontally long specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is held for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed, 10 balls have been won, 0.5 seconds have passed, or Will be released).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated as many times as the jackpot type. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is to be peeled off to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102, or the substrate boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203, a register 210 for temporarily storing data necessary for reading and writing when reading various data from the ROM 202 and the RAM 203, and writing various data to the RAM 203, and other interrupt circuit Various circuits such as a timer circuit and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  Next, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters and flags for controlling processing of the main controller 110, a storage area for storing set values, and the like. Here, the processing of the main controller 110 includes special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on the first symbol display device 37, display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and third symbol display. This is a main process of the pachinko machine 10 such as display setting in the device 81.

  FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. Are used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 Are used, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection. Further, the second per-random number counter C3 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial-value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second per-random number counter C3. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 35). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a including one execution area and four reservation areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a first entrance slot. The values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball 64a or the second entrance 64b. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second random number counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through any of the normal entrances (through gates) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 249) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 249 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 249). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 249, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 249. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball has won the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 at the timing. The random number value that is a big hit of the special symbol is set by a first random number table 202a (see FIG. 7A) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, which will be described later. When the value of the counter C1 matches the value of the random number that is a big hit set by the first random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The first random number table 202a is used for a low probability of a special symbol (a period in which the special symbol is in a low probability state) and a high probability of a special symbol having a high probability of being a big hit than the low probability (special). The period is a high probability state of symbols) and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. Note that the first per-random number table 202a1 (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability and the first per-random number table 202a2 (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability are stored in the main controller 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 199). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 199 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 199), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. At this timing, it is stored in the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 249. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that become big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7, 107, 240” is the first value for the low probability. It is stored in the hit random number table 202a. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of the special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, and the values are “4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249 ”is a first random number table for high probability. 202a. Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number that is a big hit stored in the first per-random number table 202a for low probability and the random hit that is stored in the first per-random number table 202a for high probability. Random numbers that are big hits are set so that they do not overlap with numerical values. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the timing at which the value appears is analyzed, and the jackpot is illegally assigned based on the analyzed timing. May be easier. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199. Then, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is “0 to 99” is “big hit A (short-time big hit)”. The jackpot type when the value is “100 to 179” is “big jackpot B (probability variation jackpot)”, and the jackpot type when the value is “180 to 194” is “jackpot C (latency probability variation). The jackpot type when the value is “195 to 199” is “jackpot D (rare latency probability variation jackpot)”. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that one of the four types of hit types (big hit A to big hit D) is determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. Yes.

  For example, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 199) and then returns to 0. By the fluctuation type counter CS1, for example, “completely missed” in which reach does not occur, “short reach” in which the fluctuation time is relatively short, “long reach” in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, “super reach” in which the fluctuation time is longest, etc. A rough display mode is determined. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. It is stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) and the variation type data for determining the variation time of the variation of the symbol are associated with each other and the variation type selection table 202d (FIG. 8 (a)). The variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  Although details will be described later, in the variation type selection table 202d, there are a table to be referred to when winning the jackpot (a selection table for winning 202d1) and a table to be referred to when the special symbol is not selected. Is provided. Furthermore, there are two types of tables that are referred to when the special symbol lottery is missed. Specifically, a table that is referred to when the ball enters the first entrance 64a and the special symbol lottery is off (the special table 1 off selection table 202d2), and the ball is the second entrance. There is a table (special figure 2 removal selection table 202d3) that is referred to when a special symbol lottery is missed after entering the mouth 64b. In addition, when the variation type data is selected from the special figure 2 out of selection table 202d3, the variation type data corresponding to the complete out is compared with the case in which the variation type data is selected from the special figure 1 out selection table 202d2. The percentage selected is set high. By configuring in this way, during the probable change of the special symbol that is easy to enter the second entrance 64b, and during the short-time state of the normal symbol, a short fluctuation when the special symbol is lost It is possible to easily select a time variation pattern effect. By shortening the variation time of the variation pattern production that is out of place, the player can feel the period until the next jackpot, and can feel that the jackpot continues in a short period of time, The interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  For example, the second random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 239 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C3 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C3. In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C3 is periodically updated, for example, every timer interrupt process, and it is detected that the ball has passed through the right or left normal entrance (through gate) 67. And is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  The random number value that is a normal symbol is set by a second random number table (see FIG. 7C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C3 is When the value matches the random number value set by the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is used for a normal symbol at a low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) and at a high probability (ordinary symbol) at which the probability of hitting the normal symbol is higher than the low probability. And the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (c), there are 24 random numbers that are hit by the normal symbol when the normal symbol has a low probability, and the range is "5-28". These random values are stored in a random table per normal symbol for low probability. Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 24 among the total number of random number values, and therefore the probability of jacking a special symbol is “1/10”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C3 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened for “0.2 seconds × one time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is “0.2 seconds × 1 times. ”Is opened, but the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a random table per symbol for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, when the ball passes the normal entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C3 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the normal symbol. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is ended, the stop symbol (second symbol) is displayed. ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened “twice × 1 second”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time is very short, “30 seconds → 3 seconds”, compared with the low probability of the normal symbol, and is further associated with the second entrance 64b. Since the opening period of the electric combination to be performed becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second entrance 64b. A second random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C) storing a random value for determining whether or not a normal symbol is hit from the value (random number value) of the second random number counter C3 is stored in the ROM 202. Is provided. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, if the normal symbol is a hit, the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is “1 second × 2 times”. However, the opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C3 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 35).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 9, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the register 210 of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of power shutdown (including the time of power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the values of the registers in the register 210 are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 35), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 34) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the RAM 203 has a special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and various settings. And a value storage area 203e.

  The special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each of these areas has a first per-random number counter C1. Each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1, C2, CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are stored in the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1, C2, and CS1 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins (starts winning) the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, and each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1 is acquired according to the start winning. Immediately, apart from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the acquired values of the respective counters C1, C2, and CS1. . As described above, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various types of data obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start prize (each value of each counter C1, C2, CS1). The prediction of information is described as prefetching a lottery result of a special symbol. Note that the various types of information correspond to success / failure, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

  When the prefetching is completed, a winning information command including various types of information (presence / absence, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. When the winning information command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts the success / failure type, the stop type, and the variation pattern from the winning information command, and uses them as winning information for the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. It is stored in 223a.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the second per-random number counter C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes the left or right normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four reservation areas (hold first Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C3 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is set to the execution area. Based on the value of the second per-random number counter C3 stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Shift processing is performed to pack the data in the reserved area with the area number 1 smaller. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c is a special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on a ball entering (start winning prize) into the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 64b. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of standby times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81). The initial value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and a ball enters the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 64b, and the number of balls held for variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S704 in FIG. 30). On the other hand, the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 every time the special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 25).

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 25 and S705 in FIG. 30). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 uses the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed, and the variable display hold ball held in the main control device 110. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d maximizes the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) for the variable symbol display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by one to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the normal entry port 67 and the number of held balls for variable display increases. (See S904 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a new normal symbol (second symbol) variation display is executed (see S805 in FIG. 31).

  If the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the left or right normal entrance 67, the second random number counter The value of C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (S905 in FIG. 32). On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 4 when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 on either the left or right side, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b. (S903 in FIG. 32: No).

  The various set value storage area 203e is a storage area in which various set values, flags, counters, and the like for executing the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 are stored. The MPU 201 performs control based on data stored in various setting value storage areas 203e. The various set value storage areas 203e will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Returning to FIG. Various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data are defined in the ROM 202. The contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 7A, the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per-random number table 202a, a first per-type selection table 202b, and a second per-random number table 202c. At least a variation type selection table 202d, an offset setting table 202e, a variation pattern selection table 202f, a game result setting table 202g, a state setting table 202h, and a big jackpot end clear table 202i are stored.

  As described above, the first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter C1 is stored. When any one of the random number values defined in the first random number table 202a matches the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. The

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B) is a data table in which determination values of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the big hit type are set for each big hit type. As shown in FIG. 7B, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the first hit type counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 99, the big hit this time is “big hit A (short-term big hit)”. If the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 100 to 179, the current big hit is determined as “big hit B (probability big hit)”. Also, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 180 to 194, the current big hit is determined as “big hit C (latency probability variation big hit)”, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of 195 to 199. If this is the case, the current jackpot is determined to be a jackpot D (rare latency probability change jackpot).

  The number of random numbers that are jackpots that shift to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends and that shift to the short-time state of the normal symbol are set to 100 from 0 to 99. On the other hand, 100 random numbers of 100 to 199 are set as the jackpots (jackpot B to jackpot D) that shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends. That is, the ratio of the jackpot that shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot and the jackpot that shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol is 1: 1. In addition, among the jackpots that shift to the high probability state of the special symbol, random numbers that become jackpots (jackpot C, jackpot D) that are not notified to the player that the transition to the special symbol high probability state is 180 to 199. 20 are set. That is, it is configured not to notify the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol once every five times when winning the jackpot to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol. Thereby, even if it is not informed that the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is made, the player has transitioned to the high probability state of the special symbol (that is, the jackpot C or the jackpot D) The game can be continued with the expectation of winning.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 7C) is a data table in which the hit determination value for the normal symbol is stored. As shown in FIG. 7C, when the normal symbol has a low probability (in the normal state of the normal symbol), the value of the second random number counter C3 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 5 to 28. In the case of, it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened for "0.2 seconds x once".

  On the other hand, when the normal symbol has a high probability (during the normal symbol time short state), it is determined that the normal symbol is hit when the value of the second random number counter C3 is in the range of 5 to 204. As described above, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, a symbol “◯” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). The electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is opened “1 second × 2 times”.

  The variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is a data table in which the correspondence between the variation type data for determining the rough display mode of the variation pattern and the variation type counter CS1 is defined. The variation type selection table 202d defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols and the types of entrances into which balls have entered. The variation type data selected from the variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 8A) is converted into an offset value (pattern selection offset value) based on an offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10) described later. Then, the contents defined in the address ahead of the offset value from the start address of the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) are set as the variation pattern type.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, the variation type selection table 202d includes a hit selection table 202d1, a special figure 1 off selection table 202d2, and a special figure 2 off selection table 202d3. Yes. The winning selection table 202d1 is a table for selecting variation type data when the special symbol lottery result is a big hit. In addition, the special figure 1 removal selection table 202d2 is used when the special symbol lottery (the special symbol 1 lottery) performed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64a is out of place. This is a table for selecting variation type data. The special figure 2 removal selection table 202d3 is a special symbol lottery (special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 64b. This is a table for selecting the variation type data when the lottery) is off.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 8B to FIG. 11, a flow until the variation pattern type is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) will be specifically described.

  FIG. 8B is a diagram showing a hit selection table 202d1 for selecting the variation type data based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. As shown in FIG. 8 (b), there are three types of variation patterns that can be selected in the case of special symbol jackpots: “Short Short Reach”, “Short Long Reach”, and “Short Super Reach”. On the other hand, variation type data 00H, 01H, and 02H are associated with each other. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H (per short reach) is selected as the variation type data, and 01H (per long reach) is selected as the variation type data in the range of 5 to 179. If it is selected and is in the range of 180 to 199, 02H (winning super reach) is selected as the variation type data. These variation type data are converted into a pattern selection offset value which is a value used for selecting a variation pattern type by an offset setting table 202e described later, and a variation pattern selection table described later based on the variation pattern selection offset value. The variation pattern type is selected from 202f.

  FIG. 9A shows the variation type data when the special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special symbol 1) performed based on the ball entering the first entrance 64a is out of place. It is the figure which showed the selection table 202d2 for special figure 1 removal for selecting. As shown in FIG. 9A, the variation pattern that can be selected when the special symbol 1 is not selected is “completely out”, “outside short reach”, “outside long reach”, “outside supermarket”. There are four types of “reach”, and variation type data 03H, 04H, 05H, and 06H are respectively associated with these.

  If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 164, 03H (completely out) is selected as the variation type data, and if it is in the range of 165 to 184, 04H (out of short reach) is selected as the variation type data. If it is in the range of 185 to 194, 05H is selected as the variation type data, and if it is in the range of 195 to 199, 06H is selected as the variation type data. These variation type data are also converted into pattern selection offset values using the offset setting table 202e and used to select a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f, as in the case of jackpot.

  FIG. 9B shows the variation type data when the special symbol lottery (the lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the ball entering the second entrance 64b is off. It is the figure which showed the selection table 202d3 for special figure 2 removal for selecting. As shown in FIG. 9 (b), the variation pattern that can be selected when the lottery of the special symbol 2 is out of place is “complete out”, “out short short reach”, “out long reach”, “out super There are four types of “reach”, and variation type data 07H, 08H, 09H, and 0AH are associated with them.

  If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 184, 07H (completely out) is selected as the variation type data. That is, it is set so that the rate at which complete detachment is selected is higher than when the ball enters the first entrance 64a. In the range of 185 to 194, 08H (out-of-range short reach) is selected as the variation type data. In the range of 195 to 198, 09H is selected as the variation type data, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 199. If there is, 0AH is selected as the variation type data. That is, the ratio of selection of out-reach short reach, out-reach long reach, and out-reach super reach is set lower than when the ball enters the first entrance 64a. By increasing the percentage of complete deviation and lowering the percentage of various outliers, it becomes easier to select a variation pattern production with a short variation time in the high probability state of a special symbol or the short time state of a normal symbol, so the next big hit This makes it possible to shorten the period of the game and gives the player the impression that the jackpots are continuous in a short time. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Note that the variation type data selected from the special figure 2 selection table 202d3 is also selected using the offset setting table 202e in the same manner as in the case of a big hit or when a ball enters the first entrance 64a. It is converted into an offset value and used to select a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

  FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an offset setting table 202e that is referred to in order to determine a pattern selection offset value for selecting a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

  As shown in FIG. 10, when the variation type data values selected from the variation type selection table 202d are 00H, 01H, and 02H, 00H, 01H, and 02H are respectively selected as the pattern selection offset values from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Selected. On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 03H (complete deviation from the first entrance 64a), the pattern selection offset value selected according to the number of reserved balls is changed. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 03H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 04H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 05H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 06H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. By changing the selected pattern selection offset value according to the number of reserved balls, the selected variation pattern type can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type having a shorter variation period is selected as the number of reserved balls increases. Thereby, since it can suppress that only the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation period continues, it can suppress that a player's motivation with respect to a game is scraped off.

  The process of specifying the variation pattern type based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is performed when data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area. In this case, the winning data stored in the other reserved areas are packed in the reserved areas with the smaller area numbers (the reserved first area to the reserved third area) by the shift process, so the pattern selection offset value is selected. The maximum value of the winning data (the number of balls to be held) that is held at the timing of holding is 3. For this reason, the offset value setting table 202e defines the case where the number of reserved balls is 0 to 3.

  When the variation type data value selected from the variation type selection table 202d is 04H (displacement short reach at the first entrance 64a), 07H is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). The On the other hand, if the selected variation type data value is 05H (outgoing long reach at the first entrance 64a), the pattern selection offset selected according to the number of reserved balls as in the case of complete outing. The value changes. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 08H is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 09H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 0BH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. As a result, as in the case of complete losing, it is possible to suppress that only the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation period continues, so that it is possible to suppress the player's motivation for gaming. it can.

  When the variation type data value selected from the variation type selection table 202d is 06H (displacement super reach at the first entrance 64a), 0CH is selected as the pattern selection offset value from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). The On the other hand, when the selected variation type data value is 07H (completely off at the second entrance 64b), the pattern selection offset value selected according to the number of reserved balls changes. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls is 0, 0DH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 1, 0EH is selected as the pattern selection offset value. When the number of reserved balls is 2, 0FH is selected as the pattern selection offset value, and when the number of reserved balls is 3, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. Thereby, since it can suppress that only the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation period continues, it can suppress that a player's motivation with respect to a game is scraped off.

  When the variation type data values selected from the variation type selection table 202d are 08H, 09H, and 0AH, 11H, 12H, and 13H are selected as pattern selection offset values from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), respectively. As described above, the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10) is used to select the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f.

  FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting a variation pattern type based on the pattern selection offset value. The variation pattern selection table 202f is a data table assigned to the range of addresses 1AF5H to 1B08H of the ROM 202, and one variation pattern type is defined for each address. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, “winning super reach” with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, “complete out B (special figure 1)” with a fluctuation time of 8 seconds, and “off” with a fluctuation time of 19 seconds. “Long Reach B (Special Figure 1)”, “Complete D D (Special Figure 2)” with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds, and the like are defined. Note that FIG. 1 shows a variation based on the ball entering the first entrance 64a, and FIG. 2 shows a variation based on the ball entering the second entrance 64b.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the variation pattern type for performing the variation is determined based on the variation pattern selection table 202f and the pattern selection offset value. Specifically, with respect to 1AF5H, which is the first address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, the fluctuation pattern type defined in the address ahead by the selected pattern selection offset value is determined as the current fluctuation pattern type. It is configured as follows.

  For example, if the special symbol is a big hit and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 100, 01H is selected as variation type data from the winning selection table 202d1 (see FIG. 8B). Based on the variation type data value and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10), 01H is selected as the pattern selection offset value. Therefore, as the current variation pattern type, data defined in 1AF6H, which is an address obtained by adding 01H of the pattern selection offset value to 1AF5H, which is the first address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, the “long hit reach” with a variation period of 20 seconds is selected.

  In addition, for example, when the special symbol lottery result based on the ball entering the first entrance 64a is out, the value of the variation type counter is 190, and the number of held balls is 2 Is selected from the special figure 1 selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 9A) as the variation type data 05H. Then, 0AH is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data, the number of reserved balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the current variation pattern type, data defined by 1AFFH, which is an address obtained by adding 0AH of the pattern selection offset value to 1AF5, which is the first address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, “outgoing long reach C (Special Figure 1)” having a variation time of 17 seconds is selected.

  For example, when the lottery result of the special symbol based on the ball entering the second entrance 64b is out of date, the value of the variation type counter is 20, and the number of reserved balls is 3 Is selected from the special table 2 off selection table 202d3 (see FIG. 9B) as the variation type data 07H. Then, 10H is selected as the pattern selection offset value based on the variation type data, the number of reserved balls, and the offset setting table 202e (see FIG. 10). Therefore, as the current variation pattern type, data defined in 1B05H, which is an address obtained by adding 10H of the pattern selection offset value to 1AF5, which is the first address of the variation pattern selection table 202f, is selected. That is, “completely off D (Special Figure 2)” with a variation time of 4 seconds is selected.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation pattern type is selected according to the lottery result of the special symbol, the value of the variation type counter value CS1, the type of the entrance into which the ball has entered, and the number of reserved balls. Configured to select. In addition, when the entrance into which the ball has entered is the second entrance 64b, it is easy to select a variation pattern effect with a short variation period compared to when the ball enters the first entrance 64a. It is configured. That is, a variation pattern effect with a short variation time can be easily selected during the probability change of the special symbol, which is in a state where it is easy to enter the second entrance 64b, and during the short state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the period until the next jackpot is short, and to make the jackpot feel like being continuous in a short period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the variation pattern type with a short variation time is easily selected as the number of reserved balls increases. Thereby, since it can suppress that only the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation period continues, it can suppress that a player's motivation with respect to a game is scraped off.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the data value is the same variation type, the same variation time is selected regardless of whether the variation time varies depending on the number of reserved balls and regardless of the number of retained balls. There is a disconnection, but this is not a limitation. For example, it may be configured such that the variation time varies depending on the number of reserved balls at all deviations. In addition, if the special symbol 1 is lost in the lottery, only the deviation in which the same variation time is selected is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls, and the special symbol 2 is lost in the lottery May be configured such that only a deviation is selected in which different variation times are selected in accordance with the number of reserved balls. As a result, a variation pattern effect with a short variation time can be easily selected during the probability change of the special symbol, which is in a state where it is easy to enter the second entrance 64b, and during the short time state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel that the period until the next jackpot is short, and to make the jackpot feel like being continuous in a short period, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to select the variation pattern type according to the number of reserved balls, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e. As described above, since the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data and the offset setting table 202e, the offset type table value is not provided in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting the offset value. Therefore, it is possible to complete the processing for determining the variation pattern effect mode, which is one of the most important processes in the game, without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the ROM 202 will be continued. In the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12), when the jackpot is won, setting values such as a stop symbol indicating the jackpot and an operation pattern of the special winning opening (big opening) 65a during the jackpot are set as the jackpot type. It is a data table defined for each. The game result setting table 202g will be described with reference to FIG.

  The game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12) is stored in the addresses “19D1H” to “19E8H” of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored in each address. In the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12), the number of judgment values (random number values) that are each jackpot type (number of judgment values), the lighting patterns (number of display symbols) of the plurality of LEDs 37a, and special symbols are displayed. Information indicating the stop symbol (stop symbol information), the operation pattern (large open port pattern) of the specific winning opening (large open port) 65a, and information for determining the game state after the big hit is ended (offset value) Is prescribed. In FIG. 12, the address of the ROM 202 where each data is defined is described in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address is omitted and only the lower byte is described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, based on winning the jackpot, the setting values corresponding to the winning jackpot type are stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 (see FIG. 12) from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12). 15). Details of the various set value storage areas 203e will be described later. Then, based on the setting values stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the MPU 201 performs various controls related to the variation pattern effects and jackpots that are jackpots. In addition, the various setting value storage area 203e (see FIG. 15) stores an offset value defined in the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12) in addition to a storage area for storing setting values related to the game. Offset value storage areas are provided. This offset value is a value used for setting the gaming state after the jackpot.

  Specifically, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 37) executed when it is determined that the jackpot end timing, various setting values relating to the gaming state after the jackpot end (whether or not to set a high probability state of a special symbol) Is used for selecting from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A) and setting it in various setting value storage areas 203e. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the random number value (counter value) itself acquired with the ball entering the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 64b (start winning prize) itself is terminated. The game state after the jackpot is not determined based on the random number value (counter value), but the first entry port 64a or the second entry port 64b ( Only the offset value selected based on the random value (counter value) acquired with the start winning) is held in the jackpot.

  Here, if the random number value that is a big hit is configured to be kept during the fluctuation pattern production at the time of winning the big hit or during the subsequent big hit state, it becomes a big hit by reading the big hit random number by an unauthorized player There is a possibility that the timing of appearance of the random number value is analyzed, and that it is easy to illegally win a jackpot based on the analyzed timing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the acquired random number value (counter value) is converted into a form of an offset value and held until the jackpot end time, and the gaming state after the jackpot end is set based on the offset value. Since it is configured as described above, the period in which the random number value itself that is a special symbol jackpot is held can be limited to a short time. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that is a big jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally acquired from the outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a big jackpot appears, and conduct the fraudulent act that allocates the jackpot based on the analyzed timing Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, various setting values relating to the gaming state after the jackpot end (setting values indicating whether or not a special symbol has a high probability state, a short time period of a normal symbol, etc.) are held. Instead, only the offset value, which is a value indicating the storage position of various setting values in the state setting table 202h, is stored. Rather than providing a storage area for temporarily storing all of the various setting values in the RAM 203, it is sufficient to provide an area for holding the offset value, so that the storage area of the RAM 203 can be used efficiently. Can do.

  Next, the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. This state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13 (a)) is a table in which gaming states that can be shifted to after the jackpot end are defined in order of offset values, and are executed when it is determined that the jackpot end timing is reached. It is a data table referred in order to set the gaming state after the jackpot end in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 37).

  This state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A) is stored in the range of addresses 1AD8H to 1AE3H of the ROM 202, and 1-byte data is stored in each address. In this state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A), information (special symbol lottery state) indicating whether or not to shift to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, and the short time of the normal symbol after the end of the jackpot Information indicating whether or not to shift to a state (ordinary symbol state), a short time period of a normal symbol given after the end of the jackpot (number of short times), a variation pattern selection table 202d for selecting a variation pattern mode The special symbol lottery count (variation pattern selection table switching count) required for switching from the table after the jackpot to the table corresponding to the state is defined. In FIG. 8, the address of the ROM 202 in which each data is defined is described in parentheses, but the upper byte of the address of the ROM 202 is omitted and only the lower byte is described.

  Next, the description content of the state setting table 202h in the program will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a simplified example of the description contents of the state setting table 202h of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The left side of FIG. 13B shows an example of the description content, and the right side shows the meaning of the description. As shown in FIG. 13B, first, a label “TBL1” is defined as a table name indicating the state setting table 202h. By prescribing the label name, it is possible to read the start address of the state setting table 202h only by describing “TBL1” in other processes. That is, it is not necessary to input the address value itself of the state setting table 202h in other processes. In particular, if the model changes, the control processing and the number of data stored in the ROM 202 may change. Therefore, when the program used in the pachinko machine 10 is diverted to another game machine, the state setting table 202h The assigned address value may also change. Even in such a case, if the start address of the state setting table 202h is associated with the label “TBL1”, the address in each process of reading the state setting table 202h when the program is transferred to another model. There is no need to retype. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a program input error from occurring when the program is diverted, and thus it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program error.

  In the line following the line defining the label, data corresponding to the offset value 00H among the data for defining in the state setting table 202h is described in the order of the addresses to be stored. Specifically, 00H is data for defining address 1AD8H, 00H is data for defining address 1AD9H, 64H is data for defining address 1ADAH, and data is defined for address 1AD9H. A certain 64H is described in one line. The data corresponding to the offset value 01H and the data corresponding to the offset value 02H are similarly described in one line. That is, in a single process of reading data from the state setting table 202h and setting the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, a series of continuously read data is described in one line. Thus, by describing the data corresponding to each offset value together in one line, there is no omission or duplication in the data corresponding to each offset value (the number of data corresponding to each offset value is equal to each other). The designer can easily check whether or not Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to leakage or duplication when defining data.

  In the program, the number of data corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h is set in a line between a line defining data corresponding to the offset value 00H and a line defining data corresponding to the offset value 01H. , A label “D_SIZE” is defined. In the definition, “EQUI” means equal, and “$” means the current position (the address next to the last data corresponding to the offset value 00H). That is, it is defined that “D_SIZE” is a difference between the next address at the end of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H and “TBL1” (the leading address of the state setting table 202h). In the present embodiment, since the head address of the state setting table 202h is 1AD8H and the last address of the data corresponding to the offset value 00H is 1ADBH, “D_SIZE” is 0004H, which is the difference between 1ADCH and 1AD8H. .

  Thus, by defining the label “D_SIZE” as the number of data, it is sufficient to describe only “D_SIZE” when the number of data in the state setting table 202h is used in other processing. That is, it is not necessary to define the number of data itself in other processes. In particular, if the model changes, the number of data defined in the state setting table 202h may change. Even in such a case, if the label “D_SIZE” is defined as the number of data, the number of data is rewritten in each process using the number of data in the state setting table 202h when the program is transferred to another model. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a program input error from occurring when the program is diverted, and thus it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program error.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, “D_SIZE”, which is a label indicating the number of data, is not defined by the direct value of the number of data, but is defined using the label “TBL1”. Thereby, even when the program is transferred to another model having a different number of data, it is not necessary to rewrite the definition of “D_SIZE”. Therefore, when the program is diverted, it is possible to prevent mistakes in rewriting the definition of “D_SIZE”, so that the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from malfunctioning.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, “TBL1” is defined as a label only at the head address of the state setting table 202h, but for each offset value (for each series of data read continuously in one process). Alternatively, a separate label may be defined for the head address. For example, the label “TBL2” is associated with the head address (1ADCH) of the data corresponding to the offset value 01H, and the label “TBL3” is associated with the head address (1AE0H) of the data corresponding to the offset value 02H. Also good. In this case, the definition of “D_SIZE” may be defined by the difference between “TBL2” and “TBL1”, or may be defined by the difference between “TBL3” and “TBL2”. Alternatively, the difference between “TBL3” and “TBL1” may be defined as a value obtained by dividing by 2.

  The names of the labels (“TBL1”, “D_SIZE”, etc.) are not limited to the names in the present embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined. This is because the name of the label does not affect the operation of the actual machine. More specifically, in the process of translating (assembling) the created program into a language (machine language) that can be understood by the MPU 201, all labels appearing in each process are converted into values of addresses and the number of data itself. . That is, at the stage where the program is reflected on the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, all the labels are replaced with hexadecimal machine languages. For this reason, the name of the label does not affect the operation of the pachinko machine 10 at all.

  Further, the program description method for defining the address and the number of data in association with the label is not limited to the state setting table 202h, and may be referred to in other processes such as the game result setting table 202g. The same description method may be followed for all data tables.

  Next, the jackpot end clear table 202i will be described with reference to FIG. The big hit end clear table 202i is a table stored in the addresses “1205H” to “1212H” of the ROM 202, and addresses of various setting value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15) are defined for each address. Yes. Although details will be described later, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), which is one of the jackpot end processes, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 stores the stored data in the order of the addresses in the ROM 202 from the jackpot end clear table 202i. “00H” (initial value data) is set as a set value at the address indicated by the read storage data (address data). If the data read from the big jackpot clear table 202i is “00H”, the zero setting process is terminated. In the jackpot end clear table 202i, only the setting destination address is specified, and the process of setting “00H” to the setting destination address is specified in the control program of the MPU 201. The amount of data can be reduced.

  Next, various setting value storage areas 203e provided in the RAM 203 will be described. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the various set value storage areas 203e. As shown in FIG. 15, the various setting value storage areas 203 e (see FIG. 15) correspond to the range of addresses “F000H” to “F0FFH” of the RAM 203. In the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15), the launch control signal set value storage area assigned to the address “F000H” of the RAM 203 stores a set value for controlling the launch of the sphere. This is an area, and the launch of a ball into the game area is controlled based on the set value stored in this area.

  The display LED setting area assigned to the address “F009H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which setting values of lighting patterns for lighting the display LEDs are stored. Based on the setting values stored in this area. To turn on the display LED.

  The test signal setting area 1 and the test signal setting area 2 respectively assigned to the addresses “F01DH” and “F01EH” are storage areas for storing setting values for outputting various test signals. Examples of the test signal include a signal for performing an operation test on a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a and a signal for performing an operation test at the time of a big hit. Since it is a test signal, it is set so that no signal is output while the player is playing with the pachinko machine 10 (that is, a state in which “00H” is set as the set value in both test signal setting areas 1 and 2).

  The maximum number of rounds setting area assigned to the address “F030H” is an area for setting the number of big hits. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all jackpots are jackpots with eight rounds, and therefore, when winning the jackpot, “08H” is set as a setting value.

  The gaming state setting area assigned to the address “F035H” of the RAM 203 is a storage area in which a setting value indicating the current gaming state is stored. For example, if the stored setting value is “01H”. When the special symbol is changing, “02H” indicates that the special symbol is being confirmed, and “03H” indicates that the special winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed. "04H" indicates that the jackpot is being won and the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is being opened. If it is “00H”, it is in a state other than the above (that is, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the state from the end of the jackpot until the change of the special symbol is started, or in the state where there is no holding ball. State after a certain period of time).

  The jackpot flag assigned to the address “F090H” is a flag indicating whether or not the current jackpot state (special game state) is on. If the flag is on (that is, the stored data is “01H”). ) Indicates that the special symbol is a big hit, and if it is off (ie, if the stored data is “00H”), a state other than the special symbol big hit (ie, the special symbol). State such as a fluctuation state or a demo state). The storage areas allocated to the subsequent addresses “F091H” to “F094H” are areas for setting data read from the state setting table 202h of the ROM 202.

  First, the probability change state flag assigned to the address “F091H” is a flag indicating whether or not the special symbol is currently being changed, and if it is on (that is, the stored data is “01H”). ) Indicates that the special symbol is being changed, and if it is OFF (that is, if the stored data is “00H”), it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. .

  Further, the time-short state flag assigned to the address “F092H” indicates whether or not the time of the normal symbol is short, and a setting value for designating a table for selecting a variation pattern mode at the time of detachment Is stored. If the flag is “00H”, it indicates that the normal state is a normal symbol. If the flag is “01H”, it indicates that the normal symbol is in the short time state 1.

  The time-short state counter assigned to the address “F093H” shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends, and when the normal symbol shifts to the time-short state, how many times the normal symbol time-short state remains It is a counter that indicates whether or not If the special symbol shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot is over, the normal symbol time-short state continues until the next jackpot is won, but the time-short state counter is 0 regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. is there. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the probability variation state flag is ON or the value of the time reduction state counter is 1 or more, control of the normal symbol time reduction state is executed.

  The variation selection state counter assigned to the address “F094H” is a counter indicating the number of lotteries for the remaining special symbols until the table for selecting the variation pattern effect is switched to another table. If this counter is equal to or greater than 1, a variation pattern selection table dedicated to the end of jackpot is selected as a table for selecting a variation pattern at the time of losing. On the other hand, when the value of the variation selection state counter is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the table corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the time reduction state flag.

  The offset value storage area assigned to the address “F095H” is a storage area for storing the offset value, and the set value after the jackpot is read from the state setting table 202h based on the stored offset value. , The addresses “F091H” to “F094H” of the RAM 203 are set. This offset value is read from the game result setting table 202g and stored in the offset value storage area when it is determined that the bonus symbol is a big win in the special symbol lottery. In addition, in the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) executed after the setting value is read from the state setting table 202h and the setting is completed, the initial value “00H” is overwritten.

  The large opening setting area assigned to the address “F096H” is a storage area in which a setting value indicating an opening pattern of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a that is a big hit is stored. Referenced when jackpot flag is on). In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all jackpot types are jackpots of 8 rounds, and the opening pattern of the specific winning opening (big opening) 65a is common, so a common set value is set.

  The stop symbol code information storage area assigned to the address “F097H” is an area for setting stop symbol information of a special symbol based on a special symbol lottery result. If the lottery result of the special symbol is out, a stop symbol code indicating a stop symbol corresponding to the outage is set. If the lottery result is win, the stop symbol code corresponding to the jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202e. Issued and set. At the end of the change of the special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the set value set in the stop symbol code information storage area is fixedly displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  Addresses “F09FH” to “F0FFH” are unused areas, and data stored in these areas is fixed to “00H”. Note that various setting values are assigned to addresses other than those described above in the various setting value storage areas 203e. Although explanation is omitted, for example, various counters such as a winning counter that counts the number of balls that have won a specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, and the time for switching the display of the normal symbol in the variation variation of the normal symbol are measured. Various timers such as a normal symbol display switching timer are assigned.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to centrally store various setting values, counters, timers, and the like in the various setting value storage areas 203e whose upper byte of the address of the RAM 203 is F0H. Ring buffer for storing commands (for example, variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) to be output to the sound lamp control device 113, special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, normal symbol reserved ball number storage area 203b, stack area Are stored in an address other than “F0H” (for example, an address whose upper byte is “F1H”).

  Next, the register 210 provided in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The register 210 is used for temporarily storing address data and setting value data when performing reading of data from the ROM 202 and RAM 203 and writing of setting values to the RAM 203, and performing arithmetic processing on the stored setting values. It is. As shown in FIG. 16, the register 210 includes an accumulator 210a capable of performing arithmetic processing on stored data, and general-purpose registers 210b1, 210b2, 210c1, 210c2, 210d1, 210d2 capable of storing address data and set value data. A flag register 210e for storing various flags, and an address holding register 210f for storing the upper byte (F0H) of the address of the various set value storage area 203e as a fixed value. The accumulator 210a can also be used to temporarily store data, similar to the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2.

  Each register provided in the register 210 is configured to hold 1-byte data. In addition, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2, the general-purpose register 210c1 and the general-purpose register 210c2, and the general-purpose register 210d1 and the general-purpose register 210d2 can be used in pairs. In other words, a total of 2 bytes of data can be stored in each pair of registers. The data for 2 bytes corresponds to, for example, address data in the ROM 202, address data in the RAM 203, and the like.

  The flag register 210e is provided with a different flag for each bit of 1 byte. The provided flag is, for example, a zero flag that is turned off if the operation result after executing the instruction is a value other than zero, and turned on if the operation result is zero, or data stored in any of the general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2. There is provided a load flag or the like that is OFF if the data is other than “00H”, and ON if it is “00H”.

  Hereinafter, control when data is read and written will be described. Here, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with various instructions for executing various controls of the main control device 110, and reading and writing of data is performed using one instruction among various instructions. To be executed. Specifically, for example, a transfer instruction is provided that designates a read source and a setting destination and transfers data stored in the transfer source to the setting destination.

  In this transfer instruction, at least one of the reading source and the setting destination needs to specify the accumulator 210a provided in the register 210 or any one of the general-purpose registers (general-purpose registers 210b1 to 210d2). is there. Therefore, for example, when data specified in the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 is read and the read data is stored in the address “F093H” of the RAM 203, for example, data transfer needs to be performed via the general-purpose register 210b1. Specifically, first, the address “1ADAH” is set as the read source, the general register 210b1 is set as the setting destination, and the data defined in the address “1ADAH” is stored in the general register 210b1 using the transfer instruction. Next, using the general register 210b1 as a read source and the address “F093H” as a setting destination, a transfer instruction is performed again to set the data stored in the general register 210b1 as the address “F093H”. By controlling in this way, the data defined in the address “1ADAH” of the ROM 202 can be transferred to the address “F093H” of the RAM 203 via the general-purpose register 210b1.

  Returning to FIG. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and fluctuating effects (variation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach is performed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern table 222 a that defines a plurality of variation pattern effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When a variation pattern command output from main controller 110 is received, a corresponding variation pattern mode is selected from variation pattern table 222a. Further, the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 is provided with at least a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b, a variation start flag 223c, and a stop type selection flag 223d.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main control device 110 wins a start prize, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-class counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired according to the start prize are used. , Various information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) obtained when the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is drawn is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is The main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 by a winning information command.

  When the winning information command is received, the sound lamp control device 113 extracts various kinds of information (whether it is successful, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area). Is done. In other words, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the area having the smaller area number, and the data corresponding to the winning that is oldest in time is stored in the first area.

  The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), like the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110. Thus, the counter is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls to be held (the number of standby times) of the fluctuating effects held in the main controller 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of held balls in the variable display is added by entering the first entrance 64 a or the second entrance 64 b, or in the main control device 110. When the variable display on the symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command, Stored in the symbol holding ball number counter 223b (see S1808 in FIG. 41). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b in accordance with the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with 203c.

  The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and also stores the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display controller 114 of this value, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display controller 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed in synchronization with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved ball numbers displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variation display is held.

  The variation start flag 223c is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1802 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 42). When the variation start flag 223c is turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S1805 in FIG. 41), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S1907 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, a stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and the set stop type is displayed. The display control device 114 is notified by the stop type command.

  In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 41) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Etc.). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 33).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storage. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the erroneous data. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it to the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” and then the instruction corresponding to the address “0000H”. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a possibility that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 43) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted. Therefore, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a, and the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used. Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Accordingly, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is kept overwritten without being overwritten during power-on, and the main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, and the character symbol area when the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. Further, in the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64a or the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 64b is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2403 and S2404 in FIG. 43).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the power-on variation image will be described. FIG. 18 shows that the display control device 114 is turned on when the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the power is turned on. It is explanatory drawing explaining a time image.

  The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display controller 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to turn on the main power-on main shown in FIG. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 performs the process shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, on the display screen of the main image when power is turned on, a fluctuation image at the time of power-on of “◯” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and “○” as shown in FIG. A “×” symbol power-on variation image is repeatedly displayed alternately during the variation period at the same position as the symbol. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. The result is judged, and if it is “special symbol jackpot”, the image shown in FIG. 18B is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped, and if it is “out of special symbol”, it is shown in FIG. The displayed image is displayed for a certain period after the change effect is stopped.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, the player started playing while the main image was displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power was turned on, and a ball entering the first entrance ball 64a or the second entrance 64b was detected. In this case, a power-on variation image is drawn using image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 18B and 18C are alternately displayed. The image controller 237 is instructed by the MPU 231 to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG.19 and FIG.20, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images and the back images is demonstrated. 19 and 20 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the three types of back images and the range of back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image, as shown in FIG. FIG. 19B shows the rear surface A corresponding to the “city stage”, FIG. 19B shows the rear surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, and FIG. 20 shows the rear surface C corresponding to the “island stage”. Respectively.

  Among the back surfaces A to C, the back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B are images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as shown in FIG. It is prepared in the ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  The images prepared on the rear surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as “scroll images”) are configured such that the rear images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a ′ are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and an image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and when the image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display region, the third symbol display device 81 is smoothly displayed. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

  When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to “city stage” or “empty stage”, the MPU 231 first displays the initial position of the display area between position a and position a ′ of the corresponding back image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from the left to the right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as the image from the position a to the position a ′. Therefore, on the third symbol display device 81, the image between the positions a to c can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20, the back image on the back C is the third pattern in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back C is the third pattern in a state where the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are fixed. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color of the sky image spreading over the mountain changes over time.

  When the stage is changed to “island stage” by the player's operation of the frame button 22, the rear image shown in FIG. 20A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20A, an orange sky indicating the morning glow is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from orange to vivid blue, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 20B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20B, a bright blue sky indicating the daytime is displayed. Next, with the passage of time, the color of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the rear image shown in FIG. 20C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 20C, a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as the time passes, the color of the sky gradually begins to white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 20A is restored, and the back images shown in FIGS. 20A to 20C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

  Next, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c in each back image will be described. As shown in FIG. 19A, the rear surface A corresponding to the city stage which is the initial stage is the entire rear surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Usually, the game is often performed without changing the stage while the city stage as the initial stage is displayed, so all the image data of the back A corresponding to the city stage displayed frequently is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19B, the rear surface B corresponding to the empty stage receives only a part of the rear surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b. Is stored in the rear image area 235c. Further, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 20A, and image data corresponding to the back image between FIG. 20A and FIG. 20B excluding FIG. Are stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and made resident.

  Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the player's intention, the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to immediately change the rear image, it is ideal that the entire range of image data for all the rear images is resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is within the range from the position a to the position a ′ or the range shown in FIGS. The image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 20A to 20B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the back image area of the resident video RAM 235 can be used when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the player operating the frame button 22. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial position of the back surface B or back surface C is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. So it can also can be displayed while changing the scrolling display or color over time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the back surface B and the back surface C, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

  On the back B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from the left to the right using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Meanwhile, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b ′ to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled. Therefore, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is stored. Using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from the position b ′ to the position d is scrolled by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored without delay. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the rear surface C, the images shown in FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. 20 (a) to 20 (c) and 20 (c) to 20 (a) so that the image data of the image corresponding to FIGS. ) To (b) are set. As a result, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 20B to 20C and FIGS. 20C to 20A are used for normal use while the images in FIGS. 20A to 20B are displayed. Since the image can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the rear image, the images of FIGS. 20B to 20C and FIGS. 20C to 20A are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time. be able to.

  On the back B and back C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 17) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be displayed reliably.

  Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between the position b ′ and the position b. Duplicate data is stored. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from the position b ′ on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with smooth connection. ing.

  Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that an image between the position a and the position a ′ is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with smooth connection so that the image between the positions a to c flows in the left direction.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten kinds of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Accordingly, the third symbol display device has been started in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started to change after the first ball entrance 64a or the second ball entrance 64b has entered. In 81, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the fluctuating effect is not started immediately.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as a main symbol not numbered "0" to "9", a main symbol composed of a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a character such as a rear symbol and a planer, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. It is done. Thus, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numerals from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters are displayed in accordance with various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character symbol area 235e, so that the display control device 114 performs voice lamp control. When the character design is changed based on the content of the command received from the device 113, the corresponding image data is not newly read out from the character ROM 234, but is preliminarily stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. Is read out, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed when the MPU 231 includes transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed of DRAM. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. A display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is one of the big hits If there is, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed.

  The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on, and the demo effect is started even if a predetermined time elapses after the one fluctuating effect is stopped as described above. This is an effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect due to winning is not started, and the 3rd symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered "0" to "9" is stopped. Only the back image changes as it is displayed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect and the demonstration effect is stored. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set. Similarly, a pseudo-variation data table that is a display data table for effects during the big hit state is prepared in a number corresponding to the set variation effect patterns.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and according to the type of the sprite, the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the translucency Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table. This back surface type indicates whether to display any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (any one of the “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”), or the back surface A to C. Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  When the MPU 231 specifies that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified as time elapses. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 21). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The content of the image to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each presentation. As described above, the transfer data table is resident among the sprite image data used in the presentation specified in the display data table. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 22 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 22).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, similarly to the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 21, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233 f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (c) on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to show. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2405 in FIG. 43). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3405 in FIG. 53B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2701 in FIG. 45B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45B) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 45) are performed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 45 (b) S2709) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 46 to 49) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3301 in FIG. 53A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 53B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 23) described below describing the contents of image drawing instructions is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of image data to be transferred specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of the image for one frame (FIG. 45 (b)). ) (See S2703)), pointer update processing (see S3005 in FIG. 50) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 23), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame. As shown in FIG. Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 corresponds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 45 (b) Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3007 in FIG. 50). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S3513 in FIG. 54). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 54). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that develops an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3602 in FIG. 55).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 45B) is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 55).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer that is periodically started (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup process And the main process will be described.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (249 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C3 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the variation type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When 249, 199, 199, 239) are reached, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, CS1, and C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, a normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and a through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is performed. Is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number N of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is 0 (S204: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is decremented by 1 (S205) and is changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1201) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, a jackpot determination process is performed for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot based on the data shifted to the execution area (S208). The jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S209). The variation display variation time executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f based on the variation type counter CS1 (according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S209: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S209, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S209: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S210). The stop symbol setting is performed in advance by a jackpot setting process (S308) described later with reference to FIG. 27 or a loss setting process (S309) described later with reference to FIG.

  After the process of S210 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result of the special symbol (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows: It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S211). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S211: Yes), the jackpot start corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S212).

  In the process of S211, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S211: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the short-time state counter stored in the various setting value storage areas 203e is 1 or more (S213). If the value of the time-short state counter is 1 or more (S213: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the time-short state counter (S214), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction state counter is 0 (S213: No), the process of S214 is skipped and this process is terminated.

  Next, the jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process (S208). This jackpot determination process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the execution area of the special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of the various counters, a lottery (decision of success or failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “special symbol losing” is performed, and fluctuations performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 This is a process for determining a production effect pattern (variation production pattern).

  In the jackpot determination process, first, the first hit random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability is selected from the first hit random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot. It sets as a table for doing (S301). Thereafter, the probability variation state flag stored in the various set value storage areas 203e is read (S302), and it is determined whether or not the probability variation state flag is a state indicating a high probability state of the special symbol (S303).

  As a result of the processing of S303, when it is determined that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S303: Yes), the first per random number table 202a2 for high probability is used from the first per random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. (Not shown) is newly set as a table for determining whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, instead of the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability (S304), and the process proceeds to S305. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol is not in a high probability state (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) as a result of the processing in S303 (S303: No), the processing in S304 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S305. To do.

In the process of S305, the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203 (S305), and the read value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the S
301 or the table (comparison source table) for determining whether or not the special symbol set in the process of S304 is a big hit (S306).

  As described above, in the first per random number table 202a1 (not shown) for low probability, three random numbers “7, 107, 240” are set as special symbol jackpots. In the first per-random number table 202a2 (not shown) for high probability, “4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249 ”are set. In the process of S306, the random number values defined in the table set as the comparison source table among these tables are compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 one by one.

  Based on this comparison, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of the random values defined in the comparison source table (S307), and the matching random values If there is a big hit (that is, a special symbol jackpot), a big hit time setting process for setting a variation pattern mode or a jackpot control during the jackpot is executed (S308), and the process proceeds to S310. To do. On the other hand, if there is no matching random number value in the process of S307 (that is, when the special symbol is off), the off-time setting process for setting the variation pattern mode etc. at the time of off is executed (S309), The process proceeds to S310. The details of the big hit time setting process (S308) and the lost time setting process (S309) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, in the process of S310, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared (S310), and this process ends. Since various counter values are cleared in the process of S310, even if the jackpot is reached, it is possible to clear the random number (counter value) that will be the jackpot before the jackpot state is started. Therefore, since it is possible to make it difficult for the random number value that is a big jackpot of the special symbol to be illegally acquired from the outside, analyze the timing when the random number value that is a big jackpot appears, and conduct the fraudulent act that allocates the jackpot based on the analyzed timing Can be suppressed. Specifically, the analyzed timing is set on a so-called hanging board, random numbers are acquired at the timing when a random value that is a big hit appears, and the fraudulent act of controlling to determine whether or not the big hit is determined is suppressed. Can do. In the present embodiment, the various counter values stored in the counter buffer are cleared during the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player wins the jackpot state. Clear it before it is recognized. Therefore, for example, a process of clearing the counter buffer may be executed during a fluctuating effect or before the symbol is stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number table for the low probability is set once in the process of S301 regardless of whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state. This is for setting a table for comparison. That is, when any of the first random number tables (the first random number table 202a1 for low probability or the first random number table 202a2 for high probability) is not set, the influence of noise or the like Even if there is a problem that the processing of S303 and S304, which are intermediate processes, is skipped, the jackpot based on the first hit random number table 202a1 for the low probability set at the beginning of the jackpot determination process. It is possible to determine whether it is true or not.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the jackpot setting process (S308) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. As described above, this jackpot setting process is a process for setting the variation pattern mode and the jackpot control during the jackpot.

  In this process, first, the jackpot flag of various setting value storage areas 203e is set to ON (S401), and then the value of the first hit type counter C2 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the jackpot jackpot that has been won this time is determined. The type is specified (S402). Specifically, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 is specified based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B). For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80”, the counter value is in the range of “0” to “99”, so that the big hit type of this time is specified as big hit A (short-term big hit). . Further, for example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “190”, the counter value is within the range of “180” to “194”, so that the big hit type this time is the big hit C (latency probability variable big hit). Identified.

  Next, the setting value corresponding to the identified jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202h of the ROM 202, and the setting value read is set in the corresponding storage area of the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 (S403). The process proceeds to S404. Here, as setting values that are read from the game result setting table 202h and set in the various setting value storage areas 203e, the lighting pattern (number of display symbols) of the LED 37a, information indicating the stop symbol of the special symbol (stop symbol code), And a control pattern (large opening pattern) of the specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a.

  As described above, when setting value data is read from the ROM 202 and set in the RAM 203, first, the data of the transfer source address and the data of the setting destination address are stored in any of the general-purpose registers of the register 210. Store temporarily. Then, the setting value data read from the ROM 202 based on the stored transfer source address data is temporarily stored in one of the general-purpose registers in which no address data is stored, and then the setting destination address The set value is transferred (set) to the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the data. In the process of S403, the transfer control through the register 210 is repeated for the number of set value data to be transferred.

  In the process of S402, the jackpot type is specified from the random value (counter value), and various setting values are determined based on the specified jackpot type in the process of S403, but the range of the random value (counter value) And various setting values may be defined in direct association with each other. In other words, a table defining the range of random number values (counter values) and various corresponding set values may be provided in the ROM 202, and the set values may be directly specified from the random number values with reference to this table. .

  In the process of S404, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and is compared with the hit selection table 202d1 of the fluctuation type selection table 202d, thereby selecting the fluctuation type data (S404). For example, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “10”, “01H” that is a value corresponding to the hit long reach is selected as the variation type data. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is “190”, “02H” that is a value corresponding to the hit super reach is selected as the variation type data.

  Next, the pattern selection offset value is determined by comparing the selected variation type data with the offset setting table 202e (S405). Specifically, if the selected variation type data is “00H”, “00H” is determined as the pattern selection offset value. If the variation type data is “01H”, “01H” is determined as the pattern selection offset value. If the variation type data is “02H”, “02H” is determined as the pattern selection offset value.

  Based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the variation pattern type is specified from the variation pattern selection table 202f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type defined in the previous address by the pattern selection offset value with respect to 1AF5H that is the first address of the variation pattern selection table 202f is specified as the variation pattern type in the current symbol variation. To do. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is “01H”, “win long reach” defined in the address 1A6FH, which is the address ahead of “01H” from the address 1AF5H, is specified as the current variation type.

  Then, a variation pattern command based on the identified variation pattern type is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S407). The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in an external output process (S1101) of a main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201.

  After the variation pattern is set, a game result setting value acquisition process is executed, which is a process for acquiring and setting offset information, which is information for setting the gaming state after the jackpot at the end of the jackpot (S408). This process is terminated.

  Subsequently, the game result set value acquisition process (S408) will be described with reference to FIG. The game result set value acquisition process (S408) is a process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, and is a process for holding the offset value based on the lottery result of the special symbol in the RAM 203.

  In the game result setting value acquisition process (S408), first, an offset value based on the current jackpot type is read from the game result setting table 202g (see FIG. 12B) (S501). For example, if the jackpot type this time is jackpot C, “02H” is read as the offset value. Then, the read offset value is stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e (S502), and this process is terminated.

  The offset value stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e in the process of S502 is held until the jackpot end timing, and the jackpot end process (FIG. 37) is a process for setting the state after the jackpot end. (Refer to FIG. 13A) for determining data to be read from the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). In this way, the random value (counter value) acquired with the entry to the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (start winning prize) is converted into an offset value to store the offset value storage area. Since the game state after the jackpot is set based on the offset value, the period in which the random number value that is the jackpot of the special symbol itself is held is limited to a short period of time. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol from the outside.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, in the big hit determination process (S208), when the current lottery result is determined to be out of the special symbol, it is executed to set the variation pattern mode. (S309) will be described.

  In the setting process at the time of loss, first, the special figure 1 off selection table 202d2 (see FIG. 9A) defined in the variation type selection table 202d or the special figure 2 off selection table 202d3 (FIG. 9B). The table corresponding to the entrance into which the ball has entered is read out, and the variation type data value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected (S601). Here, the table corresponding to the entrance into which the sphere entered is the special entrance 1 selection table 202d2 (FIG. 9 (a) if the entrance into which the sphere entered is the first entrance 64a. If the entrance into which the ball entered is the second entrance 64b, the selection table 202d3 for removing the special figure 2 (see FIG. 9B).

  After completion of the processing of S601, the pattern selection offset value is set to the offset setting table 202e based on the value of the selected variation type data and the current number of reserved balls (that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c). (See FIG. 10) (S602). For example, if the value of the variation type data is “03H” and the number of reserved balls is “2”, “05H” is selected as the pattern selection offset value. If the value of the variation type data is “09H”, “12H” is selected as the pattern selection offset value regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  Based on the determined pattern selection offset value, the variation pattern type is specified from the variation pattern selection table 202f (S406). More specifically, the variation pattern type defined in the previous address by the pattern selection offset value with respect to 1AF5H that is the first address of the variation pattern selection table 202f is specified as the variation pattern type in the current symbol variation. To do. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is “05H”, “completely off C (see FIG. 1)” defined in address 1AFAH, which is “05H” ahead of address 1AF5H, is selected. That is, a deviation mode in which the reach of the variation time of 6 seconds does not occur is determined as the variation pattern type. For example, if the pattern selection offset value is “12H”, “outgoing long reach (special figure 2)” defined by address 1B07H, which is “12H” ahead of address 1AF5H, is selected. In other words, a deviation mode with a reach of fluctuation time of 17 seconds is determined as the fluctuation pattern type.

  Next, a variation pattern command based on the selected variation pattern type is set in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S604), and this process ends. The variation pattern command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) described later executed by the MPU 201.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 13), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. This is a process for executing a hold process for values indicated by various random number counters when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S601). Here, a ball entering the first ball inlet 64a or the second ball inlet 64b is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S601: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserve ball counter 203c (the suspension of the variable display in the special symbol) The number N) is acquired (S702), and it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S701: No), or there is a winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b. If the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (S701: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reservation ball counter 203c is less than 4 (S703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (S704). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c changed by the calculation is set (S705).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1101) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201, the voice is stored. It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. .

  After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S705, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are It is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a in the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203c is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, on the basis of the various counter values stored in the processing of S706, prediction of whether or not the lottery for the special symbol (whether it is a big hit), its stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big win), and its fluctuation pattern are predicted. (S707). Here, whether the special symbol is a big hit or not is determined by one of the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the processing of S606 and the random number value (winning value) stored in the first per-random number table 202a. Determined by comparing one. As described above, the random number value that is the big hit of the special symbol at the low probability of the special symbol is stored in the first per random number table 202a1 for the special symbol at the low probability of 3 of “7, 107, 240”. Random numbers that are big numbers of special symbols when there is a high probability of special symbols are stored in the first per random number table 202a2 for high probability, “4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249 " It is a piece.

  Whether the current state is the low probability state of the special symbol or the high probability state of the special symbol is determined by referring to the probability variation state flag stored in the various set value storage areas 203e. Specifically, if the probability variation state flag is on, the special symbol has a high probability state, and if the probability variation state flag is off, the special symbol has a low probability state. In the process of S707, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value stored in the first random number table 202a corresponding to the state of the probability variation state flag. It is determined that the symbol is a big hit.

  Then, if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot, the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the processing of S706 and the random number value stored in the special symbol jackpot type table is compared, Of the four types of special symbol jackpots (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D), which jackpot type is determined. As described above, the jackpot type is specified by comparing the value of the first hit type counter C2 with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 7B).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the special symbol, the variation pattern type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the process of S706 is completely out of range. It is determined whether there is a missed short reach, a missed long reach, or a missed superreach. As described above, the fluctuation pattern type at the time of deviation is selected from the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) based on the pattern selection offset value obtained by converting the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 into a pattern selection offset value. .

  If the process of S707 predicts whether or not the lottery is a special symbol, the stop type (a jackpot type in the case of jackpot), and the variation pattern, then the predicted lottery and the predicted stop type, A winning information command including the predicted variation pattern is set (S708), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24).

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is accompanied by the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 64b. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by the normal symbol (second symbol) (S801). As a normal symbol (second symbol) hitting, while the second symbol display device 83 is showing a winning indication, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 64b is performed. Is included. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not being hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S802: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S803). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S804). If the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S804: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S804: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S805).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S806). In the process of S806, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the value of the second per-random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is acquired (S807).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time-short state (S808). Specifically, if the value of the time-short state counter stored in the various setting value storage area 203e of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or if the probability variation state flag is on, it is determined that the time is short for the normal symbol. .

  If it is determined in the processing of S808 that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S808: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S809). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. If the result of the determination is that the special symbol is being hit (S809: Yes), the process proceeds to S811. In the present embodiment, the special symbol is configured to be less likely to hit the normal symbol during the big hit. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specific winning opening 65a, so the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 64b is released. This is to suppress as much as possible the ball that is going to win the specific winning opening 65a from entering the second winning opening 64b. In addition, since the specific winning opening 65a is provided immediately below the first entrance 64a, it is suppressed that a ball enters the second entrance 64b during the big hit of the special symbol. Many balls enter the ball opening 64a. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first entrance 64a becomes maximum (four times).

  In the process of S809, if the special symbol jackpot is not being hit (S809: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time state of a normal symbol, so it is acquired in the process of S807. Based on the value of the second random number counter C3 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S810). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C3 is in the range of “5-204”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 205-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 7C).

  If it is determined in the processing of S808 that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S808: No), the processing proceeds to S811. In the process of S811, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C3 acquired in the process of S807 is low. Based on the random number table per normal symbol for probability, a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S811). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C3 is compared with the random value stored in the random symbol table for normal symbols for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C3 is in the range of “5-28”, it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of “0-4, 29-239”, It is determined that it is out of the normal symbol (see FIG. 7C).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol lottery result acquired by the processing of S810 or S811 is a normal symbol win (S812). If it is determined that the normal symbol wins (S812: Yes) The display mode for winning is set (S813). In the process of S813, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short time state (S814). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S814: Yes), whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is now. Is determined (S815). If it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (S815: Yes), the process proceeds to S817. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the sphere from entering the second entrance 64b as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol is off In addition, the number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory are set.

  In the process of S815, if the special symbol is not big hit (S815: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not hitting the special symbol and the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory attached to 64b is set to 1 second, and the opening frequency is set to 2 (S816), and the process proceeds to S819. If it is determined in the process of S814 that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S814: No), the process proceeds to S817. In the process of S817, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is set to 0. In addition to setting for 2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S817), and the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S812, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal symbol (S812: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S818). In the process of S818, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “x” is set to be lit as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S819.

  In the process of S819, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is in the short time state (S819). If it is determined that the normal symbol is in the short time state (S819: Yes), the variable symbol display on the second symbol display device 83 is performed. The variation time is set to 3 seconds (S820), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the short time state (that is, the normal symbol is in the normal state) (S819: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds ( S821), the process is terminated. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the normal symbol is high, the time of the variable display becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the case of the low probability of the normal symbol, and further, Since the release period of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball enters the second entrance 64b. Easy state.

  In the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S822). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S820 or the process of S821 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  In the process of S822, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S822: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S822 (S822: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S823). In the process of S823, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S813, the symbol “○” as the second symbol is displayed in the second symbol display device 83 as a stop display (lights on). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S818, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S823, when the second symbol display update process (see S1207) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the process of S813 or S818.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S824). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S824: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory attached to the second entrance 64b is set (S825), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1205) of the main process (see FIG. 35) is executed next, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is executed. Is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S824, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S824: No), the process of S825 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through-gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the normal entrance 67. This is a process for acquiring and suspending the value indicated by the random number counter C3 per two.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entrance 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S902). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S903).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the normal entrance 67 (S901: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S903: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (S901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S903: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball number counter 1 is added to the value (M) of 203d (S904). Then, the value of the second per-random number counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. (S905), and this process ends. In the process of S905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1001), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1101). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S1102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1104). If it is turned on (S1104: Yes), the process proceeds to S1112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not ended normally, the process proceeds to S1112 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S1112. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S1214 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1112, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 serving as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1112). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S1113, S1114) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S1113, S1114), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1113), and the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1114). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S1110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1104: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1105: Yes), and if the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S1107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S1108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S1109), and the process proceeds to S1110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S1110, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S1111), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an overview, each process of S1201 to S1206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1209 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1201). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) or the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning information command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Further, the round number command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1204), and then, in the case of a special symbol jackpot state, execution of a jackpot effect or a specific winning mouth of the variable winning device 65 A big hit control process for opening or closing the (large opening) 65a is executed (S1203). Here, the jackpot state of the special symbol is specifically determined that the variation time of the variation pattern production that becomes the jackpot has passed, and after the start of the jackpot is set, the end of the set jackpot Refers to the period until setting. In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1203) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling opening / closing of the electric accessory associated with the second entrance 64b is executed (S1204). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S825 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 31), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S816 or the process of S817 in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1205). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S407 of the big hit time setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S604 of the lost time setting process (see FIG. 29), the variation pattern The first symbol display device 37 starts the variable display according to the above. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S407 of the big hit time setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S604 of the lost time setting process (see FIG. 29). Is ended, the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is ended, and the process of S406 of the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) or the process of S603 of the loss setting process (see FIG. 29) The stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the above process.

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1207). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S820 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 31) or the process of S821, the variation display is performed on the second symbol display device 83. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S823 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 31), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The display of the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the processing of S813 or the processing of S818 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 31). (Lights up).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 receives the power failure signal. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1208). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1208: Yes), the process proceeds to S1201, and the processes after S1201 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1209). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (249, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1201 to S1206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C3) can be updated at random.

  In the process of S1207, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1207: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 33 has been executed, the process at the time of power-off after S1210 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1210), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1211). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1212), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1213), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area backed up in the RAM 203 and the work area.

  The process of S1207 is executed at the timing when a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in S1201 to S1206 ends, or at the timing when one cycle of the process of S1209 performed within the remaining time ends. Yes. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1201. In other words, the process can be started from the process of S1201 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized. Therefore, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the process at power-off, and the stack pointer is not changed in the initial setting process (S1101). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1203). This jackpot control process (S1203) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 35), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol jackpot state, various effects according to the jackpot are performed and a specific prize is awarded. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (large opening mouth) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1301). Specifically, if the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) S212 is executed and the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1301, when a special symbol jackpot is started (S1301: Yes), an opening command is set (S1302), and this process ends.

  The opening command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the audio lamp control is performed in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the device 113.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol jackpot is not started in the processing of S1301 (S1301: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is being hit (S1303). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1303, if the special symbol is not big hit (S1303: No), this process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if the special symbol is a big hit (1303: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1304). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1304: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened (S1305), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1306). After the round number command is set, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1201) of the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 201, the voice lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When a display round number command is received by the display control device 114, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing of a new round in the processing of S1304 (S1304: No), it is determined whether the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, 10 balls When winning, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the processing of S1307, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1307: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1308), and this processing is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1307: No), it is determined whether it is the big hit end timing (S1309).

  In the process of S1309, when it is determined that it is the jackpot end timing (S1309: Yes), the setting value corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot end is set and the setting value for the jackpot is reset. The jackpot end process is executed (S1310), the game state after the jackpot end is set, and the process ends. Although details will be described later, in the jackpot end process (see FIG. 37), the jackpot flag is initialized together with other setting values (“00H” is set). Therefore, even when the power of the gaming machine is suddenly turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, it is possible to prevent only the jackpot flag from being turned off and other set values to remain in the jackpot setting.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, an ending effect for notifying the player of the end of the jackpot is set in the final round of the jackpot after the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is established. The In the processing of S1309, when it is determined that the end timing of the set ending effect (the effect time set for executing the ending effect has elapsed), it is determined that the jackpot end timing.

  Note that the jackpot end timing is not necessarily limited to the end timing of the ending effect. For example, in the final round of jackpot, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied, it may be configured to shift to the jackpot end process (S1310) as the jackpot end timing. .

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, the jackpot end process (S1310) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 36) by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. As described above, the jackpot end process (S1310) is a process for setting a setting value corresponding to the gaming state after the jackpot end and resetting the jackpot setting value.

  In the jackpot end process (S1310), first, the state setting table 202h is read from the ROM 202 (S1401). Here, “read” means that the upper byte (1AH) and the lower byte (D8H) of the head address (1AD8H) of the state setting table 202h are used as any pair of general purpose registers (for example, general purpose registers). 210b1 and general purpose register 210b2).

  Next, in the game result set value acquisition process (see FIG. 28) executed before the current jackpot is started, it was previously stored in the offset value storage area of the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15). The offset value is stored in the accumulator 210a.

  Next, a calculation process of multiplying the offset value stored in the accumulator 210a by “D_SIZE” which is the number of data is performed (S1403). As described above, “D_SIZE” indicates the number of types of data corresponding to each offset value in the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13A). In the present embodiment, four types of set values are specified in the state setting table 202h (see FIG. 13 (a)): a special symbol lottery state, a normal symbol state, a time reduction count, and a variation pattern selection mode switching count. Therefore, the numerical value corresponding to the data number “D_SIZE” is “0004H”.

  As shown in parentheses in FIG. 13A, in the state setting table 202h, the special symbol lottery state corresponding to the offset value 00H, the normal symbol state, the number of time reductions, and the variation pattern selection are selected in the state setting table 202h. Number of mode switching, special symbol lottery state corresponding to offset 01H, normal symbol state, hourly number of times, variation pattern selection mode switching number of times, special symbol lottery state corresponding to offset 02H, normal symbol state, hourly number of times, variation Data is stored in the order of the number of times of pattern selection mode switching. That is, every time the address value increases by 4, the setting value corresponding to the offset value that is larger by 1 is stored. Therefore, the value obtained by multiplying the offset value by 4 is the difference (offset) between the head address of the state setting table 202h and the storage address of the data corresponding to the current offset value. In the process of S1403, an address difference (offset) with respect to the head address of the state setting table 202h is obtained.

  When the processing of S1403 ends, the difference between the address value set in the paired general-purpose registers (for example, the general-purpose register 210b1 and the general-purpose register 210b2) in the processing of S1401 with respect to the head address of the state setting table 202h calculated in the processing of S1402 (Offset) is added, and the address after the addition is set as the address of the data transfer source (read source) (S1404).

  Next, the address at which the probability change state flag of the various setting value storage area 203e is stored is set as the setting destination address (S1405), and the data stored in the transfer source address set in the processing of S1404 is set in the setting destination address. Is transferred (S1406).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all four types of data defined in the status setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407), and the transfer has not been completed (that is, the untransferred data type is If it is determined that it exists (S1407: No), 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address, the data defined in the address after the addition is read (S1408), and 1 is set to the set destination address. Addition is performed, and the data read out in the processing of S1408 is stored in the address after the addition (S1409). Then, returning to the processing of S1407, it is determined again whether or not all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407). That is, the processes of S1407 to S1409 are repeatedly performed until all the four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h are transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1407 that all four types of data defined in the state setting table 202h have been transferred to the various setting value storage areas 203e (S1407: Yes), the settings are made in the various setting value storage areas 203e. A state command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the state that has been set is set (S1410), processing for clearing the jackpot set value (S1411, S1412) is executed, and this processing ends.

  In the process of clearing the jackpot set value, the address immediately before the top address of the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) of the ROM 202 is set as the data transfer source (read source) address (S1411). Then, zero setting processing for executing initialization by setting 0 to the address where the setting value for jackpot in the various setting value storage area 203e is set is executed (S1412).

  Next, a zero setting process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. This zero setting process (see FIG. 38) is a process of initializing by overwriting 0 with respect to various setting values set in order to perform control with a big hit in various setting value storage areas 203e.

  In the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), first, 1 is added to the transfer source (read source) address to set a new transfer source (read source) address (S1501).

  Next, in the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14), the address data stored in the address set as the transfer source (read source) address is read, and the address of the RAM 203 indicated by the read address data Is set as a setting destination address (S1502).

  After the processing of S1502, in the processing of S1502, it is determined whether or not the data read from the transfer source (reading source) address is “00H” (S1503), and it is determined that the read data is “00H”. If so (S1503: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the read data is not “00H” (S1503: No), “00H” is overwritten on the address of the RAM 203 set as the setting destination address (S1504), and the process returns to S1501.

  Thereafter, the processes of S1501 to S1504 are repeated until “00H” is read from the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14). In the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14), “00H” is stored only in the end address, and “00H” is not stored in the addresses other than the end. The processes of S1501 to S1504 are repeated until “00H” is stored in all addresses corresponding to the address data.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a condition for terminating the zero setting process (see FIG. 38), the number of times of setting “00H” as data in the various setting value storage areas 203e of the RAM 203 is described in the control program. When it is determined that the data setting for the set number of times has been completed, it is determined that “00H” has been read as data from the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14) without being configured to end the processing. In this case, the processing is terminated.

  When the number of settings is described in the control program, the control program designer newly counts the number of settings each time the number of settings changes due to circumstances such as transferring the program to another model. It becomes necessary to rewrite the control program in accordance with the counted number. Therefore, it takes time to count the set value, and if the designer makes a mistake, the control program will specify the wrong number of repetitions, so the setting at the end of the jackpot is completed normally. The pachinko machine 10 may malfunction.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is only necessary to define “00H” as data at the end of the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14). Can reduce the possibility of making mistakes. Therefore, since the data setting at the time of the jackpot end can be more reliably executed based on the control program, malfunction of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Note that the end condition of the zero setting process (see FIG. 38) is the case where “00H” is read as data because the lower byte of the address in the various set value storage areas 203e (see FIG. 15). The address where “00H” is “00H” (ie, address “F000H”) is an area for storing the setting value related to the launch of the ball, and the address where the setting value does not change before and after the big hit ends (initialization is required at the end of the big hit This is because the address does not. Since it is an address that does not require initialization at the end of the jackpot, it is not necessary to prescribe it as an initialization target address in the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14), and the jackpot end clear table 202i (see FIG. 14). There is no possibility of appearing except at the end of). Therefore, it is possible to prevent “00H” from being read out as data before the initialization of all setting values is completed and the processing to be terminated.

<Regarding the Control Processing of the Sound Lamp Control Device in the First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1601). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the current start-up processing is performed due to an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous power outage”). ) Is determined during execution (S1602). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 40, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1713 in FIG. 40), it executes a power-off process in S1716. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1716 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1602: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S1716 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1603).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1606. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to S1604, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1603: No), the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1603: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1604. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1716, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1603: No), and the process proceeds to S1608.

  If the power-off process in progress flag is on (S1602: Yes), the startup process this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process in S1716, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1604 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1604, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1604). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1605: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1606). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1605: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1607), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S1608, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1608). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1716 is executed (see S1715 in FIG. 30). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1716 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1608. This is a case where the process is started after a power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1716 is completed. Accordingly, in such a case (S1608: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1609), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1611), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the process of S1608 is reached after the power-off flag is turned off because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S1608 is performed via the processes of S1604 to S1606. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1608: No), S1609, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1610, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1610), and interrupt permission is set. In step S1611, the process proceeds to the main process.

  The reason for skipping the clear process of S1609 is that when the process from S1604 to S1606 is reached via the process of S1606, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1604, noise, etc. Thus, when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset and start-up processing is started, the control of the sound lamp control device 113 is continued by saving the work area data in the RAM 223 without clearing it. Because it can.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the current processing of S1701 was executed (S1701). If not (S1701: No), the process proceeds to S1711 without performing the processes in S1702 to S1710. In S1701, it is determined whether 1 msec has passed or not in S1702 to S1710, which is mainly related to display (production), whereas it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1711 and the fluctuation display setting process of S1712 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1711 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110. By executing the processing of S1712 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has elapsed in the processing of S1701 (S1701: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S1703 to S1712 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1702). ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 or the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1708 described later is set (S1703), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S1704). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1705 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1705, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1706). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the reserved number display update process, a process for turning on a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1707). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Also, when the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the change effect is not executed or during the high-speed change period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1707 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, a lamp editing process is executed (S1708), and then a sound editing / output process is executed (S1709). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1709, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1710), and the process proceeds to S1711. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1708 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1709 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1711, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1711). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process, a variable display setting process is executed (S1712). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the variable display setting process (S1712) is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1713). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1713 (S1713: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1715), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1716). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1717), and then the process loops infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1713 (S1713: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1714), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1714: No), the process returns to S1701, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1714: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the command determination process (S1711) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1711). This command determination processing (S1711) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is processing.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1801). When the variation pattern command is received (S1801: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1802), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S1803). Return to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if a variation pattern command has not been received (S1801: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1804). When the stop type command is received (S1804: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1805), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1806). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1804: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1807). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S1807: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main controller 110 (special symbol). Is extracted and stored in the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1808). In the processing of S1808, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S1808 ends, the process returns to the main process.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is the main controller 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b, or when a special symbol lottery is performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the main control device by the processing of S1808. It is set to the value of 110 special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c. Therefore, even when the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is shifted from the value of the special symbol reservation ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the start winning prize is detected. When the special symbol lottery is selected, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1808 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the processing of S1807, when the pending ball number command has not been received (S1807: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1809). When a winning information command is received (S1809: Yes), various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) is extracted as winning information from the received winning information command (S1810). When the process of S1810 is completed, the winning information (win / no-go, stop type, variation pattern) extracted in the process of S1810 is used as the first free area (first area to fourth area) of the winning information storage area 223a. Store in the area (S1811)
Return to the main process.

  If the winning information command has not been received in the processing of S1809 (S1809: No), it is then determined whether or not a round number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1812). When the round number command is received (S1812: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (S1813), and the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is set ( S1814), the process ends. The display round number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1702) of the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the display control device 114. When receiving the display round number command, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if the round number command has not been received in the process of S1812 (S1812: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed ( S1819), the process returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1712). This variable display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the variation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is not on (that is, it is off) (S1901: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S1906. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned off (S1902), and then in the process of S1803 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1903).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1904). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S1905). In the process of S1905, a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1906.

  In the processing of S1906, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1906). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S1906: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, so this change display. The setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S1906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S1907), and then in the process of S1806 of the command determination process (see FIG. 41), The stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1908).

  Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1909), and the display control device is based on the set stop type. A display stop type command for notifying to 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1910), and this process is terminated. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 55, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. In addition, when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2401), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2401) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2401) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program or fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2501). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2502). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2502, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2502, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program that is started to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2503). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2504), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2401 in FIG. 43). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2402 in FIG. 43) (S2505), the boot program is finished and this boot process is terminated.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2401), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time. Can do.

  In the boot processing shown in FIG. 44, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2501 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2501 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2502 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processes of S2503 to S2505 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S2501 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2501. , And after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2502, the processing of S2503 to S2505 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2503 to S2505 without performing the processes of S2501 and S2502. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2402). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag, unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2403). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2403, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2404). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2404, then the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2405). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 53A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3702 in FIG. 53A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45 (b)), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 18 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2708 in FIG. 45 (b)) and simple display setting processing (see S2709 in FIG. 45 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, the player enters the first entrance 64a or the second entrance 64b (start winning), and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When the main control device 110 is connected via the sound lamp control device 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. It can be displayed immediately during the period and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2405, interrupt permission is set (S2406). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2406, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45A is a flowchart showing this command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2601), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 45B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 45B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2701: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2702) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2703) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2702), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command or When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command interrupt processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2703), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2702) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2704). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2703) or the simple display setting process (S2709). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2705). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 and receiving a continuous notice command or a back image change command from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2706). In this drawing process, from the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S2705). 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2707). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the processing of S2707, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, back and forth reach reach, back and forth miss) The stop type table corresponding to “reach” or “completely off” is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2701 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2701: Yes), it means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2708) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2709) is executed. Transition to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 49, details of the above-described command determination process (S2702), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 46, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2801), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2801: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (2801: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2703) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2802), and then the command The command types of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed (S2803).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2804). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2804: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2805), the process returns to S2801.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2805) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2901).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2901, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2901 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2902). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S2901 is turned on, and other variations The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to OFF (S2903). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2903, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2904), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2905). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2906), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2905, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2901. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f are extracted, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the process of S2902. The transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in (2), and the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the normal video R from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2904, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table ends. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the processing of S2804 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2804: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2806). If there is a display variation type command (S2806: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2807), and the processing returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S2807) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, stop type information (any one of jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C, jackpot D, front and rear outreach, reach other than front and rear outreach, complete out) is indicated by the display stop type command. The stop type table is determined (S3001), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S3002).

  Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S4002 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. (S3003), and this process ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is described. In the task process (S2704) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S3002 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S3003, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 46, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2806 (S2806: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2808). If there is a display round number command (S2808: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S2809), and the process returns to S2801.

  Details of the round number command processing (S2809) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3101). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3102).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3101, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S3103), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3104). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S3105), the round number command process (S2809) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 46).

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2808 that there is no display round number command (S2808: No), it is then determined whether there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2810). If there is an image change command (S2810: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2811), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 49A, details of the rear image change command processing (S2811) will be described. FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process (S2811). This rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process (S2811), first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3703) of the change of the back image when the back image change command is received in the ON state is set to ON. (S3201). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3202), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3201 is turned on, the back image type after the change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3202. . If the specified back image type is back B or back C, a part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 as described above. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that any one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type of the back image specified in the display data table, from the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S3202. The rear image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified with time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the rear image range is stored (A resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and an address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands will change due to noise and other commands, and another command will change the back image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S3202, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value in the pachinko machine 10, it is preferably set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in step S2810 that there is no rear image change command (S2810: No), it is then determined whether there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2812). If (S2812: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2813), and the process returns to S2801.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2813) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3301). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3302). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process (S2703), when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3301, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3302 is determined, and the error Processing is executed so that a warning image corresponding to the type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON in the process of S3302. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2812 (S2812: No), then a process corresponding to another unprocessed command is executed (S2819), and the process returns to S2801.

  In the process of S2801, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2801: Yes) ), The processing of S2802-S2819 is executed again. Then, the processing of S2801 to S2819 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. When it is determined in S2801 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  Note that the simple command determination process (S2708) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. 18 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop. Only the type command is extracted, the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 47 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 47 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, For a command, a process for discarding the command is executed without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 47A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2901. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2902, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233b and the content is cleared.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, the details of the display setting process (S2703) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 50, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3401), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3401: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S3402 to S3404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3405. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S3401: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S3402), S3403 and S3404. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3403, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S3403). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3403: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3404).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3501).

  In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, magnification, and rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Various parameters are determined.

  In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3501, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3502), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3404) or in the process of S3403, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3403: No), the process proceeds to S3405.

  In S3405, pointer update processing is executed (S3405). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3601). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3601, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3602). As a result, if it is End information (S3602: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3603). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3603: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3604), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3605), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3603, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the display data table for demonstration (S3603: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S3606), the process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3602, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3602: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3406). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing content expanded in the processing of S3406 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinate position for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a zoom ratio, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3407), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3408). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3408: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3408: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the fixed display flag is on. (S3409).

  As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S3409: No), the confirmed display data table has not been performed yet, and it is the timing for performing the confirmed display, so first the confirmed display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3410), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3411). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3412), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3413). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3415), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233b to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S3415 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2704), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set in S3415 is specified and the stop effect of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3409, if the confirmed display flag is on (S3409: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S3416). If the demonstration display flag is off (S3416: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demonstration display data table is displayed as the display data table. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3417), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3418). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3419). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3420), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3421), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the fanfare command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3416, if the demonstration display flag is on (S3416: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S2709) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (one of FIGS. 18B and 18C) be stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2705), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701). If it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3701: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer setting process is executed (S3702), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3701, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off (S3701: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident from the character ROM 234. The video RAM 235 is transferred. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3703), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3702), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3702).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3801), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3801: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3802). In the process of S3402, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in S3802 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3802: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3802: Yes), the process proceeds to S3803. Also, as a result of the process of S3801, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3801: No), the process proceeds to S3803.

  In the process of S3803, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3803). If there is untransferred resident target image data (S3803: No), that A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so that the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3804), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S3803 (S3803: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3805), and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 45B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2708 in FIG. 45B) and the simple display setting process (see S2709 in FIG. 45B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 46 to 49) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 50 to 52) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 54) (see S3701: No in FIG. 53A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3703), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2705) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3703).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3405) of the display setting process (S2703) executed previously is used. The information described at the indicated address is acquired (S3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3902). If it is transfer data information (S3902: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( (S3903) Further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3905.

  In the process of S3902, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3902: No), the processes of S3903 and S3904 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3905. In the process of S3905, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3905), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3905: Yes), it is further determined whether transfer of image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3906).

  In the process of S3906, when an image data transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process in S3906 (S3906: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process, and the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3906: Yes), the process proceeds to S3907. Also, as a result of the process of S3905, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3905: No), the process proceeds to S3907.

  In the process of S3907, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3907). If the transfer start flag is on (S3907: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3908), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3903 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3913. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3907: No), it is then determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S3909). If the back image change flag is not on but off (S3909: No), there is no image data to be transferred, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3909: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set to off (S3910), the back image provided for each back image type Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3911). Furthermore, the head address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state, and the transfer destination (normally) The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S3912), and the process proceeds to S3913.

  When the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the corresponding image data is all resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and therefore the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S3911, if the back image discrimination flag in the on state is the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

  In the process of S3913, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3913). The determination in the process of S3913 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3913 (S3913: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3913 (S3913: Yes), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3914). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3914, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3915), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “on” and substituting the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the details of the above-described drawing process (S2706), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704) and parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) necessary for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information) and the transfer list set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S4001). That is, in the process of S4001, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2704). The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2705), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S4002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information to instruct to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S4002, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S4003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 45B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, in order to read a setting value corresponding to an offset value from the state setting table 202h, a label “for the start address of the state setting table 202h and the number of setting values corresponding to each offset value in the program” “TBL1” and “D_SIZE” were associated with each other. That is, a label is used when a part of the table is read and set. On the other hand, in the present modification, a definition method using a table that needs to be read as a whole will be described. Examples of tables that need to be read out collectively include the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c. In this modification, the first random number table 202a will be described as an example.

  FIG. 56 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability, and FIG. 56 (b) schematically shows the first per-random number table 202a2 for high probability. FIG. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the random value defined in the first random number table 202a1 for the low probability and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer Are compared to determine whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit. On the other hand, when the special symbol has a high probability, the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a2 for the high probability is compared with the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. Then, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this special symbol is a big hit.

  As described above, in the first per random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 56A) for low probability, three random numbers “7, 107, 240” are set as special symbol big hits. ing. These three random number values are stored in, for example, addresses 1A00H, 1A01H, and 1A02H of the ROM 202, respectively.

  Further, in the first per random number table 202a2 for high probability (see FIG. 56B), “4, 11, 15, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64” are given as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols. , 78, 83, 90, 99, 106, 110, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 160, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 238, 249 ”are set. It has been done. These 30 random numbers are stored in the range of addresses 1A03H to 1A20H of the ROM 202, for example. That is, the first per-random number table 202a1 for the low probability time and the first per-random number table 202a2 for the high probability time are continuously defined so that no empty address is generated. Although details will be described later, if each table is specified continuously, if the start address of each table is known, the difference from the start address of the adjacent table is taken and the table is specified. The number of existing data can be easily calculated.

  Next, description contents of each table in the program will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of description contents of the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability and the first per-random number table 202a2 for high probability.

  As shown in FIG. 57, first, “TL_TBL” is defined as a label indicating the first probability random number table 202a1 for low probability, and the next row defines the first random number table 202a for low probability. 07H, 6BH, and F0H are defined as data to be performed. The random value is defined in order from the address 00H of the ROM 202.

  In addition, a line next to a line in which data (random value) defined in the first per random number table 202a1 for low probability is described is used as a label indicating the first per random number table 202a2 for high probability. "TH_TBL" is defined.

  From the next line in which the label “TH_TBL” is defined, 30 random values defined in the first per-random number table 202a2 for high probability are defined over 3 lines, 10 per line. Yes. Of these three rows, the first row is described in order to associate one random number value with each row of addresses 03H to 0CH, and the second row has 10 rows in each row of addresses 0DH to 16H. Random values are described for associating one by one, and the third line is described for associating ten random values one by one with each row of addresses 17H to 20H.

  In addition, by describing the random number value in a plurality of lines, the creator of the program can easily find the description omission of the random number value. That is, if 30 random values are described together in one line, it is difficult to determine how many random values are defined at a glance, and some random values are leaked. There is also a risk of oversight. On the other hand, in this modification, the same number of random number values are described separately in a plurality of lines. For example, if a part of the description of random number values is omitted only in the second line, the line length is Since only the second line is shortened, it can be determined that there is an error in the second line at a glance. Therefore, program description errors can be suppressed, and malfunction of the gaming machine based on incorrect descriptions can be suppressed. In this modified example, the number of description of random number values per line is 10. However, the number of description is not limited to this, and the number may be such that it is easy to find a description omission. For example, 6 random number values defined per line may be described in 5 lines, or 15 random number values defined per line may be described in 2 lines. .

  The second random number table 202c (ordinary random number table per symbol) for low probability is written in the line next to the line describing the data (random value) defined in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability. As a label to be shown, “FL_TBL” is defined, and from the next line, a random value that is a hit of the normal symbol at the low probability of the normal symbol is described. Although illustration is omitted, the random number value that is a normal symbol is also divided into multiple lines, with 10 random values as the maximum value per line, like the random number value that is a special symbol. Yes.

  In the program, the number of random values constituting each table is defined at a location different from the defined location of each table (the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c). Specifically, “TL_SIZE” is defined as the number of random values defined in the first per random number table 202a1 for low probability, and further defined in the first per random number table 202a2 for high probability. “TH_SIZE” is defined as the number of random values. In this way, since the number of random values is defined in association with the label, the number of random values needs to be directly counted by the program creator and specified by numerical values in all the processes for reading the random values. Absent. In particular, when the program is transferred to another model, the number of random numbers may change. In this modification, the meanings of the labels “TL_SIZE” and “TH_SIZE” change even if the number changes. Therefore, it is not necessary to rewrite the contents of the process of reading the number of random values in each process. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for omissions to occur during program diversion, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to program rewrite errors. Further, in the present modification, in the program, the location where each table is described and the location where the number of random values constituting each table are described are collectively described in one location. In this way, by putting together the description locations for each type of description content, it is possible to make it difficult to cause omission of rewriting by the program creator when diverting to other models. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a program rewriting error.

  “TL_SIZE” is defined by the difference between the address indicated by the label “TH_TBL” and the address indicated by the label “TL_TBL”. “TH_SIZE” is defined by the difference between the address indicated by the label “FL_TBL” and the address indicated by the label “TH_TBL”. As described above, if the number of random values defined in each table is defined by a label associated with the head address of each table, the specified position of the table in the ROM 202 is changed, or the random number specified in the table is changed. Even if the number of numerical values changes, there is no need to rewrite the label definition. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for omissions to occur during program diversion, so that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to program rewrite errors. Further, in this modification, one random number value is stored in one address, and the random number value is defined so that an empty address does not occur between the tables. As a result, the range of addresses in which each table is specified and the number of random values match, so the random values specified in each table can be easily obtained by the label associated with the head address of each table. It can be calculated. Note that the definition of the label is not limited to the contents of this modification, and may be arbitrarily determined so that the program creator can easily understand.

  Next, a control process of the pachinko machine 10 according to this modification will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. In the special symbol variation process (S104) of the present modification, the processes in S201 to S207 and the processes in S209 to S214 are performed in S201 to S207 in the special symbol variation process (S104) in the first embodiment. And the same process as each process of S209-S214 is performed. And in the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, if the data of the special symbol reservation storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area by the process of S207 (S207), the big hit determination process 2 is executed (S221), and this process is terminated. . This jackpot determination process 2 (S221) is based on the random number value specified in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first random number counter buffer. This is a process for determining whether or not a big hit. Details of the jackpot determination process 2 (S221) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing 2 (S221) in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. Of the jackpot determination process 2 (S221), the same processes as the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment are executed in each process of S302, S303, S305, and S307 to S310. Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, when it is determined in the process of S303 that the special symbol is in a high probability state (S303: Yes), an address represented by “TH_TBL” (that is, a high probability) The start address of the first random number table 202a2 for time is set as the comparison source address (S311), and "TH_SIZE" (that is, the number of random values defined in the first random number table 202a2 for high probability time) ) Is set as the number of comparisons (S312), and the process proceeds to S305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S303 that the special symbol is in a low probability state (S303: No), then the address represented by “TH_TBL” (that is, the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability time) Is set as the comparison source address (S313), and “TL_SIZE” (that is, the number of random numbers defined in the first random number table 202a1 for low probability) is set as the number of comparisons (S314). ), The process proceeds to S305.

  When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the first per-random number counter buffer is read in the processing of S305 that is shifted to after the processing of S312 or S314 (S305), the read first per-random number counter C1 is then read. And the random value defined in the comparison source address are compared (S315). Then, the comparison source address is incremented by 1 and the number of comparisons is decremented by 1 (S316). It is determined whether or not the number of comparisons after subtraction is 0 (S317). If the determination result is 0 (S317: Yes), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of comparisons is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) by the process of S317 (S317: No), the process proceeds to S315 again, and the process of S315 to S317 is continued until the number of comparisons becomes 0. Repeat the process. That is, each random number value defined in the first per-random number table 202a1 for low probability time or the first per-random number table 202a2 for high probability time, and the value of the first per-random number counter C1, Compare one by one across all random values.

  As described above, when the table is read or the number of random values specified in the table is read, the label is used to determine whether the program is jackpot determination process 2 (S208) when diverting the program to another model. Since it is possible to omit the correction of the description contents of, it is possible to suppress mistakes in program correction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program correction error.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the variation type data selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. The variation type data is converted into a pattern selection offset value using the offset setting table 202e, and is used to select the variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f. Further, the offset setting table 202e selects a different pattern selection offset value depending on the number of reserved balls, even if the value of the variation type data is the same, if the predetermined variation type data value (03H, 05H, 07H) It is configured to be. Thereby, the variation period of the variation pattern can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. More specifically, when a predetermined variation type data value (03H, 05H, 07H) is selected, a variation pattern type having a shorter variation time is selected as the number of reserved balls increases. Yes.

  By configuring in this way, when there are many reserved balls (that is, when the variation pattern effects are continuous), the variation time is long, and consequently, it is possible to suppress that only the variation pattern effects that are off as a result are continuous. Can do. In general, the longer the variation time of the variation pattern effect, the easier the player has a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Therefore, the longer the variation time of the variation pattern effect that is out of the game, the greater the discouragement of the player. Therefore, it can suppress that the interest with respect to a player's game is cut | disconnected by comprising so that the deviation | shift fluctuation | variation of a long fluctuation time does not continue like this embodiment.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in order to select the variation pattern type according to the number of reserved balls, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e. As described above, since the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data and the offset setting table 202e, the offset type table value is not provided in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting the offset value. Therefore, it is possible to complete the processing for determining the variation pattern effect mode, which is one of the most important processes in the game, without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the data table of the state setting table 202h and the first random number table 202a is specified on the program, it is specified in a predetermined address such as the head address of the table or the table. A predetermined name (label) is associated with the number of types of data. With this configuration, it is not necessary to directly describe the address value when configuring a program that reads a predetermined address and the number of data in the data table in another process. In particular, since the processing contents and the number of data of the data table may change if the model changes, when the program used in the pachinko machine 10 is diverted to other gaming machines, the address assigned to each data table The value and the type of data specified may change. Even in such a case, if a predetermined name (label) is associated with an address read in other processing, when the program is transferred to another model, the predetermined address of the data table and the number of data types It is not necessary to retype the address of the data table and the number of types of data at the description part of the process including the control for reading out the data and the like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a program input error from occurring when the program is diverted, and thus it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program error.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when defining a predetermined name (label) in association with the number of types of data defined in the data table, the pachinko machine 10 is associated with a predetermined address in the data table. It is stipulated using a label. Thereby, the creator of the program does not need to count the number of types of data defined in the data table and define the counted numerical value in association with a predetermined name (label). In other words, even if the predetermined address or the number of data types is changed due to program transfer or the like, the number of data types is automatically calculated as a value corresponding to the transferred program using a label. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a program input error from occurring when the program is diverted, and thus it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning due to a program error.

Second Embodiment
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, even if the value of the variation type data selected based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same, the variation period of the variation pattern can be changed according to the number of reserved balls. Therefore, the offset setting table 202e defines the pattern selection offset value differently according to the number of reserved balls. Then, different variation pattern types are selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11) according to the pattern selection offset value.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the offset setting table 202e defines that the variation type data and the pattern selection offset value have a one-to-one correspondence. That is, when the same variation type data is selected, the same pattern selection offset value is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. In this embodiment, the data configuration of the pattern selection offset value is determined. If the data configuration is a predetermined data configuration, the pattern selection offset value is converted to a new offset value. Based on the offset value, the variation pattern type is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 11). That is, instead of prescribing the offset value for the number of reserved balls in the offset selection table 202e, it is determined whether or not the program is converted to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls. Thereby, compared with the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the data capacity of the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. Whether or not the “predetermined data configuration” is described above is determined by whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1. If it is determined that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is 1, a conversion is performed in the program to add the number of reserved balls to the value with the most significant bit being 0.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the contents of the offset setting table 202e in the ROM 202 are partly changed in the main controller 110. The partial processing included in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electric Configuration in Second Embodiment>
First, an offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an offset setting table 202e in the present embodiment. In the offset setting table 202e in the first embodiment, when the variation type data value is “03H”, “05H”, “07H”, different pattern selection offset values are selected according to the number of reserved balls. However, in this embodiment, the variation type data value and the pattern selection offset value are configured to have a one-to-one correspondence.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, when the variation type data values are “00H” to “02H”, “04H”, “06H”, “08H” to “09H”, the pattern selection offset value is The same values as those in the first embodiment are defined in association with each other. That is, for each variation type data, as pattern selection offset values, "00H (00000000B in binary notation)" to "02H (00000010B in binary notation)", "07H (00000011B in binary notation)", "0CH (00001100B in binary notation)", "11H (00010001B in binary notation)" to "13H (00010011B in binary notation)" are associated with each other. In other words, the pattern selection offset value corresponding to each variation type data is data whose most significant bit is “0”.

  On the other hand, the pattern selection offset value associated with the variation type data value “03H” is “83H (binary notation 10000011B)”, and the pattern associated with the variation type data value “05H”. The selection offset value is “88H (10001000B in binary notation)”, and the pattern selection offset value associated with the value “07H” of the variation type data is “8DH (100010001B in binary notation)”. That is, the pattern offset value corresponding to the variation type data “03H”, “05H”, “07H” (that is, variation type data having different variation pattern types selected according to the number of reserved balls) is the most significant bit. Is data “1”.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is “1” in the loss time setting process 2 (see FIG. 62), which will be described later, and the variation pattern selection table. The offset value for specifying the variation pattern type is calculated from 202f (see FIG. 11). That is, if the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is “1”, the data “1” stored in the most significant bit is cleared, and a numerical value corresponding to the number of reserved balls is added (pattern selection offset). The value is converted into a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls). Since it is not necessary to prescribe data for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, the data amount of the offset setting table 202e can be reduced. In addition, whether or not to convert to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls is determined as “1” as data in the most significant bit (empty bit) of the pattern selection offset value that is not used in the first embodiment. This is done depending on whether it is stored. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether or not to convert to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls without increasing the number of bits of the pattern selection offset value.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to store information corresponding to an offset value for selecting a variation pattern type from the variation pattern selection table 202f in the lower bits of each pattern selection offset (upper bits Does not store information corresponding to the offset), it is possible to determine whether or not to perform conversion according to the number of reserved balls using the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value is converted to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls depending on whether or not “1” is stored as data in the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to store in the sixth bit or the like.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. First, FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main controller 110, and as described above, the special symbol holding ball storage area Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area 203a, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the change effect performed by the device 81.

  Of the jackpot determination process (S208), the processes of S301 to S308 and S310 are the same as the processes of S301 to S308 and S310 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, respectively. Executed. Then, in the jackpot determination process in the second embodiment, the setting process 2 at the time of losing (S311) is executed instead of the setting process at the time of losing (S309) in the first embodiment. That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the second embodiment, in the process of S307, it is determined that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 does not match any random value defined in the comparison source table. In this case (S307: No), the setting process 2 at the time of disconnection is executed (S311), and the process proceeds to S310. This off-set time setting process 2 is a process for setting the variation pattern mode when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the same manner as the off-set time setting process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the above-described setting process 2 at the time of disconnection (S311) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the off-set time setting process 2 (S311). This lost time setting process 2 (S311) is a process executed in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 61) by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As described above, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of place. This is a process for setting a variation pattern mode.

  Of the failure time setting process 2 (S311), the processes in S601 and S604 are the same as the processes in S601 and S604 in the loss time setting process (see FIG. 29) in the first embodiment, respectively. Is done. In the failure time setting process 2 (S311) in the second embodiment, when the variation type data is selected from the variation type selection table 202d based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the process of S601 (S601), Based on the selected variation type data, a pattern selection offset value is determined from the offset setting table 202e (S611), and it is determined whether the most significant bit of the determined pattern selection offset value is “1” (S612). . If it is determined that the most significant bit is “1” (S612: Yes), the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is cleared to “0”, and the current selection of the currently held ball is added to the pattern selection offset value. The number (that is, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203c) is added and set as a new offset value (S613), and the process proceeds to S615.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S612 that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is not “1” (that is, “0”) (S612: No), the pattern selection offset value determined in the process of S611 Is set as an offset value as it is (S614), and the process proceeds to S615. In the process of S615, the fluctuation pattern type that is specified this time for the fluctuation pattern type that is specified in the previous address by the offset value set in the process of S613 or S614 is changed for the 1AF5H that is the start address of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f. The variation pattern type for pattern production is selected (S615). Then, after the process of S615, the process proceeds to S604.

  In this way, it is determined whether or not the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is “1” in the process of S612. If the most significant bit is “1”, the value is converted to a value corresponding to the number of reserved balls. With this configuration, the number of data defined in the offset setting table 202e can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, it is defined that the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is “1” in the variation pattern type that varies the variation time according to the number of reserved balls. Yes. Further, when the variation pattern type is selected based on the pattern selection offset value selected from the offset setting table 202e, the number of reserved balls is determined based on whether the most significant bit of the pattern selection offset value is “1”. It is configured to determine whether or not to convert to a corresponding value. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to prescribe each pattern selection offset value for the number of reserved balls in the offset setting table 202e, so that it is possible to reduce the data amount prescribed in the offset setting table 202e. Therefore, since the capacity increase of the ROM 202 can be suppressed, the production cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e, similarly to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. As described above, since the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data and the offset setting table 202e, the offset type table value is not provided in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting the offset value. Therefore, it is possible to complete the processing for determining the variation pattern effect mode, which is one of the most important processes in the game, without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment described above, the variation pattern selection table 202f is used for each of the big hit, the detachment when the sphere enters the first entrance 64a, and the detachment when the sphere enters the second entrance 64b. The variation pattern type is selected. Further, in some cases, even if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same, a variation pattern effect of a different mode is set according to the number of reserved balls.

  In addition to this, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is configured such that different variation pattern types are selected based on the previous jackpot type (first symbol type) and the number of lotteries of special symbols after the jackpot. Has been. Thereby, since the variation of a variation pattern effect can be diversified, it can suppress that an effect becomes monotonous. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of 3rd Embodiment, it alert | reports whether it transfers to the high probability state of a special symbol after the end of jackpot based on the content of the effect performed in the predetermined period after a jackpot ends. It is configured as follows. Specifically, after the jackpot ends, until the special symbol lottery ends 10 times, the third symbol display device 81 produces an effect in which the display image is ranked up, and the rank is maximum. When it becomes, it will alert | report that it changed to the high probability state of a special symbol. More specifically, in the third symbol display device 81, an effect that the plant displayed on the screen grows is performed, and when the plant has grown and the flower has bloomed, the state shifts to a high probability state of the special symbol. (See FIGS. 71 to 75). In this way, by executing the rank-up effect for a predetermined period, it is possible to make the player feel anxious about the result of each effect, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment in that, in the main controller 110, the first hit type selection table 202b, the fluctuation type selection table 202d in the ROM 202, and the offset The contents of the setting table 202e and the variation pattern selection table 202f are partly changed, and the selection table 202j at the time of detachment is newly added. In the RAM 203 of the main control device, the hit type storage area 203e and the variation counter 203g Is added to the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, the rank information storage area 223e is added to the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, and is included in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Part processing in the second embodiment The difference from the pachinko machine 10 is that the partial process included in the main process (see FIG. 40) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. is there. Other configurations, other processes executed by the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114 are described in the first embodiment. The same as the pachinko machine 10 in FIG. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, and illustration and description thereof are omitted.

<Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment>
First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with a hit type storage area 203f and a variation counter 203g. It has been. The hit type storage area 203f is an area for storing data corresponding to the jackpot type, and the previous jackpot type can be specified based on the data stored in this area. The variation counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the end of the jackpot, and is cleared to 0 every time the jackpot is won.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, a rank information storage area 223e is provided in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, an effect is performed in which the display image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is ranked up. Data for specifying this rank is stored in the rank information storage area 223e, and based on the stored data, control is performed so that an appropriate effect according to the current rank is executed.

  FIGS. 64 to 70 are a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment and various data defined in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 64A, the ROM 202 of this embodiment is provided with a disconnection selection table 202j in addition to the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. As will be described in detail later, this out-of-bounds selection table 202j is obtained from a plurality of tables defined in the variation type selection table 202d, the last jackpot type (first symbol type), and the special symbol executed after the jackpot This table is used to select one table according to the number of lotteries.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, there are 14 types of jackpot types: “time and bonus jackpot A” to “hour and hour jackpot C”, “probability variation jackpot A” to “probability variation jackpot H”, “latency probability variation jackpot A” to “latent probability variation jackpot C”. A jackpot is provided. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 69”, “time and hit hit A” is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 Is in the range of “70 to 89”, “B & C per hour” is selected, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “90 to 99”, “C / C per hour” is selected. Is done.

  In addition, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “100 to 101”, “probable variation big hit A” is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “102 to 106”. In this case, “probability variation jackpot B” is selected, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “107 to 111”, “probability variation jackpot C” is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2 Is in the range of “112 to 126”, “probability jackpot D” is selected. Further, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “127 to 141”, “probable big hit E” is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “142 to 151”. In this case, “probability variation big hit F” is selected, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “152 to 161”, “probability big hit G” is selected and the value of the first hit type counter C2 Is in the range of “162 to 171”, “probability big hit H” is selected.

  When the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “172 to 176”, “latent probability variation big hit A” is selected, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “177 to 186”. In some cases, “latency probability variation jackpot B” is selected, and when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “187 to 199”, “latency probability variation jackpot A” is selected.

  “Time and bonus jackpot A” to “time and jackpot bonus C” are different from each other in the selection method of the variation pattern type after the jackpot, but other than that (number of jackpot rounds, hourly number of normal symbols, etc.) This is the same as the “big hit A (short-term big hit)” in the second embodiment. Also, for “probable big hit A” to “probable big hit H”, the selection method of the variation pattern type after the big hit ends is different from each other, but other operations such as the number of big hit rounds are similar to the “big hit B” in the second embodiment. (Probable jackpot) ”. Similarly, regarding “latency probability variation jackpot A” to “latency probability variation jackpot C”, operations other than the method of selecting the variation pattern type are the same as “big hit C (latency probability variation jackpot)” of the second embodiment.

  In this way, by providing a variety of jackpots with different variation pattern type selection methods, various variation pattern effects can be executed, so that the effects can be prevented from becoming monotonous. . Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, the variation type selection table 202d defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation type selection table 202d. In the variation type selection table 202d of the second embodiment, three types of tables are defined: a hit selection table 202d1, a special figure 1 out selection table 202d2, and a special figure 2 out selection table 202d3. In the present embodiment, in addition to the above three types of tables, the latent selection table 202d4, the promotion period selection table 202d5, the promotion period selection table 202d6, the promotion period selection table 202d7, the promotion period selection table 202d8, and the promotion There are nine types of tables: period selection table 202d9, promotion period selection table 202d10, promotion period end selection table 202d11, promotion period end selection table 202d12.

  Although the selection table 202d4 for latent time has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, the player has not been notified of the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol in the rank-up effect. In this case, the table is used to select the mode of the out-of-range variation effect at the end of the rank-up effect.

  Further, the promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table that is referred to during the period in which the rank-up effect is executed, and is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the rank-up is not selected. In contrast, the promotion period selection table 202d6 is a table in which the probability that the variation type data corresponding to the rank increase is selected is set to a low probability (30%). The promotion period selection table 202d7 has a medium probability (50%) of the probability that the variation type data corresponding to the rank increase is selected, and the promotion period selection table 202d8 includes the fluctuation corresponding to the rank increase. The probability that the type data is selected is set to a high probability (70%), and in the promotion period selection table 202d9, the probability that the variable type data corresponding to the rank increase is selected is set to the maximum (90%). ing. In addition, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which variation type data corresponding to effects that are ranked up to the maximum rank at a stretch is always selected regardless of the current rank status.

  Further, the promotion period end selection table 202d11 is a table in which variation type data corresponding to the effect informing that the rank has not been fully increased in the rank improvement effect is always selected. The selection table 202d12 is a table in which variation type data corresponding to the effect informing that the rank has been increased to the maximum rank (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol) is selected. By selecting each of these tables in accordance with the jackpot type and the number of lotteries for special symbols after the jackpot ends, a wide variety of effects can be executed. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In FIG. 65, in order to simplify the description, No. 0-No. Although 11 numbers are shown in association with each other, in an actual program, separate labels are described in association with the head addresses of the tables. And when reading a table by another process, each table is read by the label matched with each table. As a result, when the program is diverted, only the label definition needs to be changed, and there is no need to modify the program for each process of reading the table. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from malfunctioning when erroneous data is defined. Examples of label names associated with each table are, for example, “C_TBL0” to “C_TBL11”.

  Next, referring to FIG. 66 (a), after the jackpot ends, the player has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol. The details of the latent selection table 202d4 used for selecting the variation pattern type at the time of deviation when not notified will be described. FIG. 66A is a diagram showing the value of the variation type data selected for each value of the variation type counter CS1 defined in the latent selection table 202d4. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, “07H” is selected as the variation type data, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 150 to 174. For example, “08H” is selected as the variation type data, and if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 175 to 189, “09H” is selected as the variation type data and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 190 to 199. In the range, “0AH” is selected as the variation type data.

  In the selection table 202d4 for latent time, the selection ratio of “07H”, which is variation type data corresponding to complete deviation, is set lower than the selection table 202d3 for deviation from the special figure 2 (FIG. 9B), The ratio at which the variation type data corresponding to the outbreak short reach, outlier long reach, and outlier super reach is selected is set high. That is, when the latent selection table 202d4 is selected, it is easy to select a variation pattern type having a long variation time. As a result, even if the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is not notified in the rank-up production, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol is made internally by the continuous variation pattern effect having a long variation period. Can be expected from the player. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66B, the promotion period selection table 202d5, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. The promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table in which no rank increase occurs. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 99, it corresponds to the variation pattern type (short-term variation for promotion period) in which the variation time is short and the rank-up fails. If the variation type data “0BH” to be selected is selected and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 100 to 199, the variation pattern type (for the promotion period) that has a relatively long variation time and fails to rank up “0CH” which is the variation type data corresponding to the long variation A) is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66C, the promotion period selection table 202d6, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. The promotion period selection table 202d5 is a table in which the probability of rank increase occurring is set to a low probability (30%). As shown in FIG. 66 (c), if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 79, it corresponds to the variation pattern type (short-term variation for promotion period) that has a short variation time and fails to rank up. Fluctuation type data “0BH” is selected and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of 80 to 139, the fluctuation time is relatively long and the fluctuation pattern type (for the promotion period) that fails to rank up “0CH” which is variation type data corresponding to the middle variation A) is selected. Further, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 140 to 199, the variation type data corresponding to the variation type (promotion period middle variation B) for which the variation time is relatively long and the rank is successfully upgraded. “0DH” is selected.

  The promotion period selection table 202d7 to the promotion period selection table 202d9 are fluctuation type data corresponding to a fluctuation type (promotion period middle fluctuation B) in which the fluctuation time is relatively long and the rank is successfully upgraded. Since only the rate at which “0DH” is selected increases, illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67A, the promotion period selection table 202d10, which is a table referred to during the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, the promotion period selection table 202d10 is a table in which a variation type that is ranked up to the highest rank is selected regardless of the current rank. As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the promotion period selection table 202d10 is selected, all the fluctuation type counter CS1 values correspond to the fluctuation type that is ranked up to the highest rank (promotion period long fluctuation A). “0EH” which is the variation type data to be selected is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67 (b), the promotion period end selection table 202d11, which is a table referred to at the end of the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, the promotion period end selection table 202d11 is a table in which the variation type data corresponding to the effect informing that the rank has not been fully increased in the rank-up effect is always selected. As shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the promotion period end selection table 202d11 is selected, the variation type for notifying that all the variation type counters CS1 have not been ranked up to the maximum rank. “0FH”, which is variation type data corresponding to (promotion period long variation B), is selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67 (c), the promotion period end selection table 202d12, which is a table referred to at the end of the rank-up effect, will be described. As described above, in the promotion period end selection table 202d12, the variation type data corresponding to the effect informing that the rank has been increased to the maximum rank (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol) is always selected. It is a table. As shown in FIG. 67 (c), when the promotion period end selection table 202d12 is selected, the fluctuation type (promotion period) for notifying that the rank has been increased to the maximum rank in the values of all the fluctuation type counters CS1. “10H”, which is variation type data corresponding to the long variation C), is selected.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a variety of variation pattern effects are selected according to the game situation with reference to the various tables described above. Thereby, it can suppress that a production becomes monotonous and can improve the interest to a player's game.

  Next, the offset setting table 202e defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 shows the structure of the offset setting table 202e. As shown in FIG. 68, the offset setting table 202e in the third embodiment includes a pattern selection offset value corresponding to the variation type selected in the rank-up period, and the variation in addition to the offset setting table 202e in the second embodiment. Correspondence with the value of type data is defined. More specifically, the pattern selection offset value “14H” is associated with the variation type data value “0BH”, and the pattern selection offset value “15H” is associated with the variation type data value “0CH”. The pattern selection offset value “16H” is associated with the value “0DH” of the variation type data, and the pattern selection offset value “17H” is associated with the value “0EH” of the variation type data. The pattern selection offset value “18H” is associated with the value “0FH” of the variation type data, and the pattern selection offset value “19H” is associated with the value “10H” of the variation type data. Yes.

  Subsequently, a variation pattern selection table 202f for selecting a variation pattern type based on the pattern selection offset value will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202f. As shown in FIG. 69, in the variation pattern selection table 202f in the third embodiment, in addition to the variation pattern selection table 202f in the second embodiment, the variation pattern type selected in the rank-up period is defined.

  More specifically, address 1B09H has a variation time of 6 seconds and a variation pattern type (short variation for promotion period) that fails to rank up is defined. Address 1B0AH has a variation time of 8 seconds. There is a variation pattern type (promotion period middle variation A) that fails to be ranked up, and the address 1B0BH has a variation time of 9 seconds. Middle fluctuation B) is defined. Further, the address 1B0CH has a change time of 12 seconds and a change pattern type (long change B for promotion period) that is promoted to the maximum rank is defined, and the address 1B0DH has a change time of 13 seconds. In addition, a variation pattern type (long variation B for promotion period) for notifying that it was not possible to be promoted to the maximum rank in the rank-up effect is defined, and the variation time is 14 seconds at the address 1B0EH. A variation pattern type (elevation period long variation C) for notifying that the player has been promoted to the maximum rank in the up effect is defined.

  In this way, by defining various variation pattern types, it is possible to select various variation pattern types according to the state of the game, so that it is possible to suppress the production from becoming monotonous. it can. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the disconnection time selection table 202j defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described. This off-time selection table 202j includes a special symbol lottery number executed after the jackpot end (the number of fluctuations after the jackpot end) for each previous jackpot type, and a table referred to for selecting the variation type data. It is a table that defines the relationship. 70, “No.” represents “No.” attached to each table defined in the variation type selection table 202d (see FIG. 65).

  As shown in FIG. 70, for example, if the previous jackpot was “time and bonus jackpot A”, the special symbol lottery will be held until the special symbol lottery ends nine times after the jackpot bonus A ends. Each time it deviates, No. is selected from the variation type selection table 202d. 5 table is read out and referred to in order to select the variation type data. In addition, No. The table of 5 means the promotion period selection table 202d6. Therefore, in the display effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the lottery of each special symbol, there is an effect that the rank is succeeded only with a probability of 30%. Not done. In the 10th special symbol drawing, no. 10 tables are read and referred to in order to select variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 10 means the promotion period end selection table 202d11, in the variation pattern effect, an effect for notifying that the rank cannot be increased to the maximum rank is performed. And in the special symbol lottery after the 11th, according to the type of the entrance that entered, No. 1 table, or No. 1 One of the two tables (that is, either the special figure 1 off selection table 202d2 or the special figure 2 off selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to in order to select the variation type data.

  Also, for example, if the previous jackpot was a “probable bonus jackpot D”, it will change every time the special symbol lottery ends after the probability bonus jackpot D ends, until the special symbol lottery ends nine times. No. is selected from the type selection table 202d. 7 is read and referred to in order to select variation type data. In addition, No. The table 7 means the promotion period selection table 202d8, so that in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the lottery for each special symbol, the effect of succeeding in rank-up is performed with a probability of 70%. Is called. In the 10th special symbol drawing, no. 11 tables are read and referred to in order to select variation type data. In addition, No. The table 11 means the promotion period end selection table 202d12, so that it can be notified that the rank can be increased up to the maximum rank in the variation pattern effect (that is, the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol). Will be performed. And in the special symbol lottery after the 11th, according to the type of the entrance that entered, No. 1 table, or No. 1 One of the two tables (that is, either the special figure 1 off selection table 202d2 or the special figure 2 off selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to in order to select the variation type data.

  Also, for example, if the previous jackpot was a “probable bonus jackpot G”, it will change every time the special symbol lottery ends after the probability variation jackpot G ends, until the special symbol lottery ends four times. No. is selected from the type selection table 202d. The table 8 is read and referred to in order to select the variation type data. In addition, No. The table of 8 means the promotion period selection table 202d9, and therefore, in the display effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 in the lottery of each special symbol, an effect that succeeds in ranking up is performed with a probability of 90%. Is called. In the 5th special symbol drawing, no. The table of 9 is read and referred to in order to select variation type data. In addition, No. Since the table of 9 means the promotion period end selection table 202d10, the effect of raising the rank to the maximum rank is performed in the variation pattern effect. And in the special symbol lottery after the sixth time, according to the type of the entrance that entered, No. 1 table, or No. 1 One of the two tables (that is, either the special figure 1 off selection table 202d2 or the special figure 2 off selection table 202d3) is read out and referred to in order to select the variation type data.

  It should be noted that despite the previous jackpots from “Time and Bonus Bonus A” to “Time and Bounty Jackpot C”, and “Hidden Probability Jackpot A” to “Hidden Probability Jackpot C”, the ranks will not increase to the highest rank. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured so that the current rank can be grasped. Specifically, the current rank is determined based on the rank information stored in the rank information storage area 223e. Then, in the state where the rank information is one rank below the maximum rank, the variation pattern type corresponding to the rank increase (that is, the long variation A for the promotion period with a variation time of 12 seconds) is determined by the variation pattern command. When notified, it is configured such that a variation pattern effect mode in which the variation time is the same (12 seconds) and the rank-up fails is selected. Based on the selected mode, a display variation pattern command is set.

  Although not shown in the figure, the selection table 202j at the time of disconnection includes a lottery number of special symbols when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed, and a table to be selected. The correspondence relationship is also stipulated. As a control when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed, for example, a special symbol 1 off selection is selected until the first big win is won, regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries. Either the table 202d2 or the special figure 2 removal selection table 202d3 is selected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rank-up effect from occurring immediately after the power is turned on (that is, the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol). Therefore, even though there is no possibility of shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol, a rank-up effect occurs, and the player is confused, or it is difficult to have a sense of expectation for the rank-up effect. This can be suppressed.

  The control when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed is not limited to this. For example, the variation type selection table 202d may be configured to prepare a table that is selected only during the period from when the power is turned on until the first jackpot is won, so that a dedicated variation pattern type is displayed. . Since the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) of the pachinko machine 10 is often pressed when the hall is opened, by preparing a dedicated variation pattern type, The variation pattern type can be enjoyed. Therefore, since the game can be started for the player immediately after opening the store, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall can be improved.

  Next, a specific example of the rank-up effect executed in the third symbol display device 81 during the rank-up period will be described with reference to FIGS. In the rank-up effect of the present embodiment, the rank D, which is the lowest rank, is set after the jackpot. Then, every time the variation pattern type corresponding to the rank increase is selected, the rank is increased in the order of rank C, rank B, rank A, rank S. If the rank is increased to rank S, the player is notified that the special symbol has shifted to the high probability state.

  FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing a state where the third symbol fluctuates in the rank-up period in the case of rank D, which is the lowest rank. As shown in FIG. 71 (a), “rank D” is displayed in the rectangular area provided at the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 during the variation of the third symbol. That is, the rectangular area provided at the upper left is an area for displaying the current rank information.

  In addition, in the horizontally long and substantially rectangular region provided at the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, “Rank up when chance chance (341) appears” is displayed. With this display content, the player is informed that a rank up will be performed when a combination of “3”, “4” and “1”, which is a chance, appears as a result of the variation pattern effect. Yes. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play in the hope that a chance will appear.

  In the rectangular area provided at the upper right of the third symbol display device 81, “9 remaining promotion opportunities” is displayed. This number is a number indicating how many remaining rank-up periods remain, and is displayed by one subtraction every time the variation pattern effect is executed once.

  Further, an image of the ground is displayed at the lower right of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, plants grow on the ground according to the rank, and the plant is in a state of flowering at the highest rank (see FIG. 74). Thus, the player can easily recognize the current rank by displaying a visually comprehensible presentation.

  FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing the display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is not raised as a result of the variation pattern effect executed during the rank-up period. As shown in FIG. 71 (b), when the rank is not upgraded (that is, when the promotion period short variation or the promotion period middle variation A is selected as the variation pattern type), “3 ”,“ 4 ”, and combinations other than“ 1 ”(in the example of FIG. 71B, combinations of“ 3 ”,“ 8 ”, and“ 1 ”) are stopped and displayed. In addition, on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, a character “sorry ...” is displayed to notify the player that the rank could not be improved.

  Next, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is increased will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing display contents when ranks are increased in rank D, which is the lowest rank. In the case of ranking up, first, symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” that are combinations of chances are displayed, and the ground displayed in the lower right of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. An effect in which light is inserted from above is displayed (see FIG. 72A). Then, plant sprout appears on the ground, and “Rank up!” Is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 72B). As a result, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been increased. Further, “rank D → C” is displayed in the area provided at the upper left of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 72B). Thereby, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the rank has been increased from rank D to rank C by the current rank increase.

  Next, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when it ranks up from rank C to rank B is demonstrated with reference to Fig.73 (a). As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when rank C is increased from rank C to rank B, the bud displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 grows. Specifically, the number of plant leaves increases to four, and the total length of the plant approximately doubles. Similarly to the case where the rank is increased from rank D to rank C, “Rank Up!” Is displayed in the area provided at the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, “rank C → B” is displayed in the area provided at the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to rank B by the current rank increase. In addition, although illustration was abbreviate | omitted, before a plant grows, the effect that light inserts into the bud of a plant from the upper part is performed. That is, when ranking up to rank B, the same effects as in FIG. It should be noted that the same effect is performed when ranking up to rank A or rank S, but illustration is omitted.

  Next, a case where the rank is increased from rank B to rank A will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 73 (b), when the rank is increased from rank B to rank A, the plant displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 further grows, and a flower bud is displayed at the tip of the plant. Is done. Similarly to the case of rank-up to rank C or rank B, “Rank-up !!” is displayed in the area provided at the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. In the area provided at the upper left of the third symbol display device 81, “rank B → A” is displayed. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to the rank A by the current rank increase.

  Next, the case where the rank is increased from rank A to rank S will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 74, when the rank is increased from rank A to rank S, a state in which the plant displayed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 has flowered is displayed. Similarly to the case where the rank is raised to another rank, “Rank up!” Is displayed in the area provided in the upper center of the third symbol display device 81. Further, “rank A → S” is displayed in the area provided at the upper left of the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the rank has been raised to rank S by the current rank increase.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern effect executed at the end of the rank-up period will be described. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the rank is raised to the highest rank, and FIG. 75 (b) is a case where the rank is not raised to the highest rank. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a), when notifying the player that the rank has been increased to the highest rank and the special symbol has shifted to the high probability state, “3”, A chance of a combination of “4” and “1” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the flowering plant on the right side shines. In addition, in the area provided at the upper center of the 3rd symbol display device 81, a character “probability entry” is displayed, and in the upper right region of the 3rd symbol display device 81, the character “promotion” is displayed. Is displayed. Actually, when the jackpot is over, it has shifted to a high probability state of a special symbol, but by displaying this “promotion” character, the player launches a ball during the rank-up period Depending on the timing or the like, it can be felt as if it has been shifted to a high probability state of a special symbol by itself. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), when the maximum rank cannot be reached during the rank-up period, a stop symbol other than the chance eye is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the stop symbol of the third symbol. (In the example of FIG. 75 (b), a combination of “3”, “5”, and “1”), and the plant on the right side is displayed withered. In addition, in the area provided at the upper center of the third symbol display device 81, characters “promotion failure ...” are displayed, and in the upper right region of the third symbol display device 81, “remaining promotion chance remaining” is displayed. With these displays in which the characters “0 times” are displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rank could not be increased to the maximum rank.

<Regarding Control Processing of Main Controller in Third Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third embodiment. This jackpot determination process (S208) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) of the main controller 110, and as described above, the special symbol holding ball storage area Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area 203a, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “exclusion of special symbol” is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the change effect performed by the device 81.

  Of the jackpot determination process (S208), the processes of S301 to S307 and S310 are the same as the processes of S301 to S307 and S310 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 26) in the first embodiment, respectively. Executed. In the big hit determination process in the third embodiment, instead of the big hit time setting process (S308) and the lost time setting process 2 (S311) in the second embodiment, the big hit time setting process 2 (S321) and the lost time Setting processing 3 (S322) is executed.

  That is, in the jackpot determination process (S208) in the third embodiment, it is determined in the process of S307 that the value of the first hit random number counter C1 matches one of the random number values specified in the comparison source table. In the case (S307: Yes), the big hit time setting process 2 (S321) is executed, and the process proceeds to S310. This jackpot time setting process 2 is a process for setting a variation pattern mode when it is determined that a special symbol jackpot, as in the jackpot time setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, in the process of S307, when it is determined that the value of the first per-random number counter C1 does not match any random value defined in the comparison source table (S307: No), the setting process at the time of loss 3 is executed (S322), and the process proceeds to S310. Similar to the off-time setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment, the off-time setting process 3 is a process for setting a variation pattern mode when it is determined that the special symbol is off.

  Next, the big hit time setting process 2 (S321) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the big hit time setting process 2 (S321). Of the jackpot setting process 2 (S321), the same processes as the jackpot setting process (see FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed in the respective processes of S401 to S408. In the jackpot setting process 2 in the third embodiment, after determining the jackpot type in the process of S402, data corresponding to the jackpot type is stored in the hit type storage area 203f (S411). Here, as the data corresponding to the jackpot type, for example, values from “00H” to “0DH” are allocated in the order of the jackpot type defined in the first hit type selection table 202b, and assigned to the current jackpot type. The obtained value may be stored in the hit type storage area 203f.

  Next, the value of the variation counter 203g is cleared (S412), and the process proceeds to S403. The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is configured to determine the type of the variation pattern based on the data corresponding to the jackpot type stored in the hit type storage area 203f and the value of the variation counter 203g. Yes.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the above-described setting process 2 at the time of disconnection (S311) will be described. The off time setting process is a process executed in the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 61) by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As described above, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of the way, the variation pattern mode is changed. This is a process for setting. In the failure time setting process 3 (S322), in S601, S604, and S611 to S613, the same process as the failure time setting process 2 (see FIG. 62) in the second embodiment is performed. In the failure setting process 3 in the third embodiment, first, 1 is added to the value of the variation counter 203g (S621). Then, the table to be referred to is changed based on the selection table 202j at the time of losing based on the value of the fluctuation counter 203g after adding 1 and information based on the previous jackpot type stored in the hit type storage area 203f. A selection is made from the type selection table 202d (S622). When the process of S622 ends, the process proceeds to S601. By the processing of S621 and S622, it is possible to execute a wide variety of variation patterns based on the jackpot type of jackpot that was won last time and the number of lotteries of special symbols executed after the jackpot has ended. The interest in games can be improved.

  It should be noted that the loss time setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) of the present embodiment is based on the information stored in the hit type storage area 202f and the value of the fluctuation counter 202g regardless of the state of the gaming machine. The table for selecting the type data is selected, but the information stored in the type storage area 202f only for the high probability state of the special symbol or the short time state of the normal symbol, and the variation counter 202g The table for selecting the variation type data may be selected based on the value of. That is, if the special symbol is not selected in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, either the special symbol 1 selection table 202d2 or the special symbol 2 selection table 202d3 is selected. May be configured to be selected. As a result, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, the table for selecting the variation type data is selected from the variation type selection table 202d based only on the type of the entrance into which the ball has entered. Since it can be done, judgment conditions can be reduced. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced.

<Regarding Control Processing of Sound Lamp Control Device in Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the variable display setting process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1712) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. This variation display setting process (S1712) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 40) of the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variation effect, This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the control device 110.

  Of the variable display setting process (S1712), in S1901 to S1903 and S1905 to S1910, the same processes as the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) in the first embodiment are executed. . In the command determination processing in the third embodiment, when the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is acquired in the processing of S1903 (S1903), the extracted variation pattern and rank information storage area are obtained. Based on the information about the current rank stored in 223e, a display variation pattern command corresponding to an appropriate variation pattern effect corresponding to the rank is set (S1911). After the end of the process of S1911, the process proceeds to S1905.

  By setting a display variation pattern command in consideration of the rank information stored in the rank information storage area 223e, an appropriate display effect corresponding to the rank is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the rank-up effect. Can be made.

<Modification of Third Embodiment>
Next, a modification of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, when the special symbol lottery is out of place, a variation pattern that differs depending on the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol lotteries executed after the jackpot ends. The type was configured to be selected. In this modification, in addition to this, a different variation pattern type is selected according to the variation pattern type selected when the previous jackpot is notified. Thereby, since the variation pattern effect can be executed in a wider variety of modes than the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  First, with reference to FIG. 80, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification will be shown. FIG. 80 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to a modification of the third embodiment. In the present modification, in addition to the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the RAM 203 is provided with a variation type storage area 203h for storing information for identifying a variation pattern type when notifying the previous jackpot. Is different. As will be described in detail later, when the special symbol is not selected, the variation pattern type is set based on the information stored in the variation type storage area 203h. In addition, about another structure, it is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment.

  Next, the variation type selection table 202d in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81A shows a variation type selection table 202d defined in the ROM 202 in this modification. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in this variation, No. As a table corresponding to 13, a special mode selection table 202d13 is added. Although the details will be described later, the special mode selection table 202d13 indicates that the variation pattern effect after the jackpot is executed when the variation pattern effect mode for notifying the previous jackpot is executed in a so-called premium reach manner. It is a table referred when selecting an aspect. This special mode selection table is a table that may be selected after the jackpot is completed when a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state of a special symbol is won, and the variation time is extremely short (for example, 0. 0). 5 seconds) Variation type data corresponding to the variation pattern type is defined.

  Further, in place of the winning selection table 202d1 in the third embodiment, No. 13, no. 14, a non-probability variation selection table 202d14 and a probability variation selection table 202d15 are added. In the present modification, the variation type data is selected from different tables depending on whether or not the probability variation jackpots A to H are won. Furthermore, the variation type data corresponding to the hit premium reach is defined only in the table that is referred to at the time of the probability big hit. As a result, a premium reach occurs only in the case of a probable big hit, so a player who recognizes that the current reach is a premium reach will recognize that it will shift to a high probability state with a special symbol during the change pattern production. be able to. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. In addition, when this winning premium reach is set, as a display effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the effect which a plant blooms may be performed, for example. Normally, it is informed whether the plant has shifted to the high probability state of the special symbol depending on whether the plant blooms during the rank increase period after the jackpot ends, but if the hit premium reach is displayed, Before entering the rank-up period, the effect that the plant blooms is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the transition to the high probability state of the special symbol after the jackpot ends before the transition to the jackpot state.

  FIG. 81 (b) is a diagram showing a non-probable hitting selection table 202d14 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the non-probable change selection table 202d14, when the value of the change type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 4, 00H is set as the change type data corresponding to the hit short reach. When the selected variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 5 to 179, 01H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the hit long reach, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 180 to 199. In this case, 02H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the hit super reach.

  FIG. 81 (c) is a diagram showing a probability variation hit selection table 202d15 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. As shown in FIG. 81C, in the non-probable variation selection table 202d15, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 0 to 149, 01H is obtained as variation type data corresponding to the hit long reach. When the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected to be in the range of 150 to 169, 02H is selected as the variation type data corresponding to the hit super reach, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of 170 to 199. 11H is selected as variation type data corresponding to the hit premium reach.

  Next, the disconnection time selection table 202j of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing the out-of-bounds selection table 202j of the present modification. As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, when the previous jackpot is various probable variation jackpots, the variation pattern type selected after the jackpot is ended according to the variation pattern informed of the jackpot. Is different. Specifically, the previous jackpot type is jackpot A, and the variation pattern type selected when notifying the jackpot is “hits short reach”, “hits long reach”, “hits super reach” (non-premium reach) If it is, the same table as the off-time selection table 202j in the third embodiment is selected from the variation type selection table 202d.

  On the other hand, if the previous jackpot type is jackpot A and the variation pattern type selected when notifying the jackpot is “winning premium reach”, regardless of the number of lotteries for the special symbol after the jackpot ends, No. Twelve tables are selected. That is, the variation type data is selected from the special mode selection table 202d13. As described above, in the special mode selection table 202d13, variation type data corresponding to a variation pattern type having an extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is defined, so that a winning is not suspended. Since it is executed immediately, the game can be speeded up. Therefore, since the experience time until the next jackpot can be shortened, it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpots are continuous at very short intervals in the high probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  As for probability variation jackpots B to H, as with probability variation jackpot A, the variation pattern types selected when notifying the jackpot are “hit short reach”, “hit long reach”, “hit super reach” (non-premium reach). ), The same table as the off-time selection table 202j in the third embodiment is selected from the variation type selection table 202d. If the variation pattern type selected when notifying the jackpot is “winning premium reach”, no. Twelve tables are selected. Although illustration is omitted, the third implementation is performed regardless of the variation pattern type when the jackpot is notified when the previous jackpot is a short-term jackpot A to C and a latent probability variation jackpot A to C. The same table as the detachment selection table 202j in the form is selected from the variation type selection table 202d.

  In this modified example, the table selected after the jackpot notified by the hit premium reach is set as the special mode selection table 202d13 regardless of the number of special symbol lotteries, and an extremely short variation time (for example, 0.5 seconds). ) Variation is executed, but is not limited to this. For example, a variation pattern type having a relatively long variation time (for example, 20 seconds) may be selected. Further, as a display effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a display effect peculiar to the end of the jackpot (special mode) notified by the hit premium reach may be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player play the game in one pleasure to see the special effects displayed only in the special mode. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In addition, as an example of the display effect in the variation pattern effect executed after the end of the jackpot, for example, it may be configured to execute an effect in which a plant in a flowered state produces fruit. That is, if the fruit is fruit, it indicates that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, and if the fruit is not fruitful, it indicates that the lottery is out of the special symbol lottery. By configuring in this way, a win premium reach is executed, and after the jackpot ends, the story shifts to the high probability state of the special symbol, and in the flow until winning the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol, the story A series of characteristic display effects can be executed. In order to further enhance the relevance of the performance, the display effect during the jackpot may be an effect related to plants. For example, if an effect that a plant is flowered by a hit premium reach and a jackpot is notified, even if an effect that the fireworks shine on the background to celebrate the flowering of the plant in the notified jackpot, Good. By comprising in this way, the connection of the production | presentation displayed on a 3rd symbol display apparatus in a hit premium reach, and the fluctuation pattern production | presentation after a big hit becomes easier to understand. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  In this modified example, if the jackpot type is a probable jackpot A to H, the variation pattern effect can be selected in a hit premium reach mode. The premium reach may be selected only in the probability variation jackpot A). That is, in the variation type selection table 202d, for example, even in the case of probability variation jackpots B to H, variation type data is selected with reference to the non-probability variation selection table 202d14, and only when probability variation jackpot A is selected. The table 202d15 may be selected. In addition, a dedicated table for probability variation jackpots B to H is provided, and the mode of winning premium reach is not selected, but the variation type data is selected in a form different from the time and college jackpots A to C and the latent probability variation jackpots A to C. You may comprise. In this way, if the hit premium reach is selected only for a portion of the probable jackpots A to H (for example, the jackpot A), the hit premium reach or the state after the jackpot A has ended (special Mode). Therefore, when a hit premium reach or a special mode appears, the player can be given a great satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment.

  Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 according to the present modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84. First, FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the jackpot determination process (S208) of the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification. Of the jackpot determination process of this modification, the processes of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 are the same as the processes of S301 to S307, S310, and S321 of the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 76) in the third embodiment. Is executed.

  Further, in the jackpot determination process of the present modification, the result of comparing the random value defined in the first hit random number table 202a with the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the first hit random number counter buffer. When it is determined that there is no matching random number value (S307: No), instead of the failure time setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment, the loss time setting process 4 is executed (S331), The process proceeds to S310. This off-set time setting process 4 is a process for setting a variation pattern type for notifying that the special symbol lottery has been missed. Details of the off-set time setting process 4 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the off-time setting process 4. In this lost time setting process 4, the same processes as the lost time setting process 3 (see FIG. 78) in the third embodiment are executed in the processes of S601, S604, S611 to S614, and S621. Also, in the loss time setting process 4 of the present modification, when 1 is added to the value of the fluctuation counter 203g in the process of S621 (S621), then the value of the fluctuation counter 203g, the jackpot type of the previous jackpot, Based on the variation pattern type at the time of reporting the previous jackpot, the table defined at the corresponding position in the off-time selection table 202j is selected (S631). The variation pattern type when the previous jackpot is notified is determined based on information stored in the variation type storage area 202h. Specifically, when selecting a variation pattern type of jackpot, for example, a pattern selection offset value is stored as information that can identify the variation pattern type. When the process of S631 ends, the process proceeds to S601.

  In this lost time setting process 4, the variation pattern type can be selected by referring to the variation pattern type at the time of the previous jackpot in addition to the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol lotteries, so that the third embodiment A wider variety of variation pattern effects can be executed than the pachinko machine 10 of FIG. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be further improved.

  It should be noted that the loss time setting process 4 (see FIG. 84) of the present modification is the information stored in the hit type storage area 202f, the value of the variation counter 202g, and the variation type storage area regardless of the state of the gaming machine. The table for selecting the variation type data is selected based on the information on the variation pattern type in the previous jackpot stored in 202h, but the high probability state of the special symbol, or the normal symbol Based on the information stored in the type storage area 202f only in the short-time state, the value of the variation counter 202g, and the information on the variation pattern type in the previous jackpot stored in the variation type storage area 202h, the variation type data is obtained. You may comprise so that the table for selecting may be selected. That is, if the special symbol is not selected in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, either the special symbol 1 selection table 202d2 or the special symbol 2 selection table 202d3 is selected. May be configured to be selected. As a result, in the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, the table for selecting the variation type data is selected from the variation type selection table 202d based only on the type of the entrance into which the ball has entered. Since it can be done, judgment conditions can be reduced. That is, the processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment and its modification, in setting the variation pattern effect, not only the lottery result of the special symbol and the entrance where the ball entered, but also the previous winning The table is selected based on the type of jackpot or the number of lotteries for special symbols executed after the jackpot is over. Thereby, since various variation pattern effects can be executed, it is possible to suppress the effects from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  Also in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment and its modification, the pattern selection offset value is determined from the variation type data using the offset setting table 202e, as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. . As described above, since the pattern selection offset value can be determined by a simple process of comparing the variation type data and the offset setting table 202e, the offset type table value is not provided in the control process without providing the offset setting table 202e. The processing load on the MPU 201 can be reduced as compared with the case of directly converting the offset value. Therefore, it is possible to complete the processing for determining the variation pattern effect mode, which is one of the most important processes in the game, without delay. Therefore, it takes time to determine the mode of the variation pattern effect, and the variation pattern effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the display is delayed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. Giving can be suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment and the modification thereof, the rank-up effect is configured to continue until the longest special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to continue until a lottery is performed four times, or may be configured to continue until a special symbol lottery is performed 20 times.

  In the third embodiment and its modifications, five ranks of rank D, rank C, rank B, rank A, and rank S are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, three ranks may be provided, or ten ranks may be provided. Further, it is not always necessary to perform rank-up one step at a time, and a pattern of rank-up by two steps or rank-up by three steps may be provided.

  In 3rd Embodiment and its modification, when it became the maximum rank, it was comprised so that it might alert | report to transfer to the high probability state of a special symbol, However, The content to alert | report is restricted to this. It is not a thing. For example, it may be notified that a long period is selected as the short period of the normal symbol given after the jackpot.

  In the third embodiment and its modification, the table selected from the variation type selection table 202d does not change after the end of the rank-up effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times or more after the jackpot ends, the selected table may be different. Thereby, when a variation pattern effect is executed 100 times or more, a variation pattern effect having a different aspect is selected, and therefore it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming monotonous. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved. Further, for example, the table to be selected may be changed when the special symbol lottery is performed 500 times or more after the jackpot is completed, or when it is performed 1000 times or more. As a result, it is possible to provide a variation pattern effect form that cannot be seen unless a special symbol is drawn 500 times or 1000 times or more continuously. Therefore, even if the player continues to lose the special symbol lottery, the player can continue to play the game with the motivation to see different modes of variation pattern effects.

  In the third embodiment and its modified example, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the table for selecting the variation type data is selected from the variation type selection table 202d based on the previous jackpot type. However, the condition for selecting the table is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that a table may be selected according to the time slot | zone which performs a variation pattern production | presentation, the classification of the background image at the time of execution, the remaining frequency of the short state of a normal symbol, etc. Thereby, since the variation pattern effect can be executed in various ways, it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming monotonous.

  In the third embodiment and the modification thereof, when the probability variation jackpots A to H are won, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute the variation pattern type in a hit premium reach manner. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it will be in an advantageous state for a player. For example, when the lottery result this time is a big hit and a win that is a big hit is put on hold, a winning premium reach may be selected. This allows the player to recognize that the big hits continue for an extremely short period of time by executing the variation pattern effect in the form of hit premium reach, so the player has a great satisfaction Can be given. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the modified example of the third embodiment, when the previous jackpot is a probable jackpot A to H, when the lottery result of the special symbol after the jackpot is missed according to the aspect of the variation pattern effect informing the jackpot However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of winning a short-term or long-term hit A by winning short reach or winning long reach, the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which the rank increase occurs with a low probability (30%) in the rank increase period is selected. When winning time and college winning A is won by winning super reach, the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which the rank increase occurs with high probability (70%) in the rank increase period may be selected. Further, for example, when winning a promising big hit A by winning short reach or winning long reach, the promotion period selection table 202d8 in which the rank increase occurs with a high probability (70%) in the rank increase period is selected. When the probability variation jackpot A is won by winning super-reach, the promotion period selection table 202d6 in which the rank increase occurs with a low probability (30%) in the rank increase period may be selected.

  By configuring in this way, when the big hit is notified by the hit short reach, the degree of expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d8 is selected increases as the rank rises. It is possible to increase the expectation for being a jackpot A (that is, shifting to a high probability state of a special symbol). Further, when the big hit is notified by the winning super reach, the degree of expectation that the promotion period selection table 202d6 is selected increases as the production that ranks up fails, so the previous big hit is a promising big hit A (That is, a transition to a high probability state of a special symbol) can be enhanced. In other words, depending on the variation pattern type at the time of informing the previous jackpot, the player is asked that the rank up occurs frequently, or conversely, the player is asked that the rank up does not occur. Therefore, even with the same rank-up effect, different game play can be realized. Therefore, the interest in the game of the player can be improved.

  In the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of the way, it is referred to select the variation type data according to the type of the entrance where the ball entered, the number of reserved balls, etc. The table is configured so that a different table is selected, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a win, the table is configured so that a different table is selected from the variation type selection table 202d according to the game situation. May be. Thereby, since the variation pattern effect for informing the jackpot of the special symbol can be diversified, it is possible to suppress the effect from becoming monotonous.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, it is good also as a pachinko machine which combined a part or all of each above-mentioned embodiment, respectively.

  Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments are shown.

<Feature A group> (Data specified in the table is set using a label)
Control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, storage means for storing a plurality of information groups composed of one or more pieces of information for the control means to control, and the control means from the storage means Information group selecting means for selecting one information group used for control by the means, and a head position specifying means for indicating a head position of a predetermined information group in a storage area in which the plurality of information groups are stored. The gaming machine A1 is characterized in that the information group selecting means selects the one information group based on the head position indicated by the head position specifying means.

  According to the gaming machine A1, a plurality of information groups composed of one or more pieces of information for the control means to control are stored in the storage means, and one information group used for control by the control means from the storage means. Are selected by the information group selection means. Among the storage areas in which a plurality of information groups are stored, the start position of the predetermined information group is indicated by the start position specifying means, and based on the start position indicated by the start position specifying means, the information group selecting means One information group is selected.

  As a result, in the control processing for designating one information group, it is only necessary to read the head position of the predetermined information group, and there is no need to individually describe the information constituting the information group in the program. Therefore, when diverting a program to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large amount of information on the program, so that it is possible to prevent a value rewriting error from occurring. Therefore, there is an effect that malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A1, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position specifying means The predetermined position of the predetermined information group indicated by the start position specifying means and the start position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the specifying means. Information number calculating means for calculating the number of pieces of information constituting the information group, wherein the information group selecting means includes a head position specified by the head position specifying means and information calculated by the information number calculating means. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that one information group is selected from the number of the game machines.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, among the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, the designation position indicates the head position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designation means. Based on the start position of the predetermined information group indicated by the start position specifying means and the start position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the specifying means, the information number calculating means The number of pieces of information to be configured is calculated. One information group is selected by the information group selecting means from the starting position specified by the starting position specifying means and the number of information calculated by the information number calculating means.

  Thereby, in the program, it is not necessary to specify the number of information constituting the information group numerically. Therefore, the information group is configured when the program is diverted to another model having a different number of information constituting the information group. In the process using the number, the step of rewriting the number can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a correction error of the program creator.

  In the gaming machine A2, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information, and each information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored one by one in the plurality of addresses. A gaming machine A3, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses at which information can be stored. Each piece of information constituting a plurality of information groups is stored one by one at the plurality of addresses.

  As a result, the number of addresses in which information is stored matches the number of information in the information group, so the number of information can be easily calculated by the information number calculation means based on the range of addresses in which information is stored. There is an effect that can be calculated.

  In the gaming machine A3, identification data for identifying the information group is associated with a head address among the plurality of addresses where the plurality of information groups are stored, and the head position The gaming machine A4, wherein the designation means and the designation means designate a head address of the information group based on the identification data.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, identification data for identifying the information group is associated with the leading address among the plurality of addresses in which the plurality of information groups are stored, and based on the identification data, the leading position designation means, And the start address of the information group is designated by the designation means.

  As a result, since the head position designation means and the designation means do not need to designate the head position by the address itself, even if the storage address of each information group is changed when the program is transferred to another model, In the control processing program for reading each information group, it is not necessary to rewrite the head position. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a program rewriting error.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, acquisition means for acquiring random information, random information acquired by the acquisition means, and comparison means for comparing the information group selected by the information group selection means; A gaming machine A5, comprising: bonus game granting means for deciding whether or not to grant a bonus game advantageous to the player based on a comparison result by the comparison means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, the random information acquired by the acquiring means and the information group selected by the information group selecting means are compared by the comparing means, and a privilege game advantageous for the player is given based on the comparison result by the comparing means. Whether or not to do so is determined by the privilege game granting means.

  Thereby, since it can be determined at random whether a privilege game is provided, there exists an effect that a player can feel a sense of fairness.

  In the gaming machine A5, the comparing means compares the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selecting means with the random information in the order of addresses where the information is stored. Characteristic gaming machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the information constituting the information group selected by the information group selecting means is random information in the order of the addresses where the information is stored by the comparing means. Since the comparison is performed, the information to be compared with the next random information can be specified by a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load at the time of performing the comparison by the comparison means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A6, the comparing means includes the random information acquired by the acquiring means a number of times corresponding to the number of information calculated by the information number calculating means, and the information selected by the information group selecting means. A gaming machine A7, which compares with each piece of information constituting a group.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A6, the random information acquired by the acquisition unit as many times as the number of information calculated by the information number calculation unit and the information group selection unit are selected. Since the comparison with each piece of information constituting the information group is performed by the comparison means, it is not necessary to perform a process for separately determining the number of comparisons. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load at the time of performing the comparison by the comparison means can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when it is determined that the bonus game is given by the bonus game granting means, the random information acquired by the acquiring means is deleted before the bonus game is given. A gaming machine A8, comprising an erasing means for performing the above-described operation.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines A5 to A7, when it is determined to give a bonus game by the bonus game granting means, acquired before granting the bonus game by the erasing means Since the random information acquired by the means is erased, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the lottery result corresponding to the grant of the bonus game from being illegally acquired from the outside.

<Feature B group> (Calculate the number of data using labels)
A control means for controlling a game according to a predetermined control procedure, a storage means for storing a plurality of information, and a part of the storage means, and configured by a plurality of information used for the control means to perform control. A storage area storing a plurality of information groups, and information group selection means for selecting one information group used for control by the control means from the storage area, and all the information groups are the same number In the storage area, each piece of information constituting the plurality of information groups is sequentially stored in a plurality of addresses associated with the storage area without empty addresses. And the information group selecting means selects the information group based on a start address of the predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number. Game machine B1 which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine B1, the game is controlled by the control means in accordance with a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of pieces of information are stored by the storage unit, and a plurality of information groups including a plurality of pieces of information used for the control unit to perform control are stored in a storage area that is a part of the storage unit. One information group used for control by the control means is selected by the information group selection means from the storage area. All information groups are composed of the same number of pieces of information. In the storage area, each piece of information constituting a plurality of information groups is stored in order without empty addresses at a plurality of addresses associated with the storage area. The information group is selected by the information group selection means based on the start address of the predetermined information group stored in the storage area and the specific number.

  As a result, the information group can be specified simply by defining the start address of the predetermined information group and the specific number, so it is necessary to define the start position of each information group on the program. Absent. Therefore, when diverting a program to another model, it is not necessary to rewrite a large number of values such as the head position of each information group on the program, so that it is possible to suppress occurrence of a value rewriting error. Therefore, there is an effect that malfunction of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine B1, among a plurality of the information groups stored in order in the storage area, an address designating unit that indicates a head address of an information group stored next to the predetermined information group; A gaming machine B2 comprising: a specific number calculating means for calculating the specific number from a start address of an information group and an address indicated by the address specifying means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the head address of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group among the plurality of information groups stored in order in the storage area is indicated by the address specifying means. The specific number is calculated by the specific number calculating means from the start address of the predetermined information group and the address indicated by the address specifying means.

  As a result, there is no need to input a specific number as a numerical value in the program, so when the program is transferred to another model with a different specific number, etc., the specific number is entered in each process for performing control using the specific number. The repairing step can be omitted. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to a program correction error.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, identification information storage means for storing a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from the plurality of information groups, and stored in the identification information storage means Identification information selection means for selecting one identification data from the plurality of identification data, wherein the information group selection means includes the one identification data selected by the identification information selection means, and the storage area. The game machine B3 is characterized in that the information group is selected based on the head address of the information group stored at the head and the specific number.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of identification data used for selecting one information group from a plurality of information groups is stored in the identification information storage means, and from the plurality of identification data stored in the identification information storage means, One identification data is selected by the identification information selecting means. An information group is selected by the information group selection unit based on the one identification data selected by the identification information selection unit, the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area, and the specific number.

  As a result, when any information group stored in the storage area is referred to in each control process, it is not necessary to individually identify and refer to the address where the information defined in the information group is stored. . Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when the information group is selected by the information group selection means can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine B3, the information group selection means is ahead of the value calculated from the identification data of 1 and the specific number with respect to the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area. The game machine B4 is characterized in that the information group defined at the position is selected.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, only the value calculated from one identification data and a specific number with respect to the head address of the information group stored at the head of the storage area Since the information group defined at the previous position is selected by the information group selection means, the information group can be selected by a simple process. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load when the information group is selected by the information group selection means can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, information storage means capable of storing information, and information storage control means for controlling the information storage means to store the one information group selected by the information group selection means The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the control means performs control based on the information group stored in the information storage means.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, one information group selected by the information group selection unit is controlled to be stored in the information storage unit by the information storage control unit, and control is performed based on the information group stored in the information storage unit. Control is performed by means.

  Thereby, the control means only needs to perform control based on the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance, and there is an effect that the processing load of the control means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine B5 includes lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery, and bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the fact that the lottery means obtains a predetermined lottery result. The selecting means is for selecting the first identification data based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined lottery result, and the first identification data selected by the identification information selecting means is selected. A gaming machine B6, comprising holding means for holding until a predetermined condition is satisfied, wherein the information group selection means selects the information group based on the predetermined condition being satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are produced. In other words, based on the fact that the lottery performed by the lottery means results in a predetermined lottery, a privilege game advantageous to the player is awarded by the privilege game granting means. Further, based on the fact that the lottery performed by the lottery means a predetermined lottery result, one identification data is selected by the identification information selecting unit, and the one identification data is held until the predetermined condition is satisfied by the holding unit. Is done. Then, based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information group is selected by the information group selection means.

  Thereby, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, an information group can be selected and set quickly based on one identification data held by the holding means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from malfunctioning due to the delay in setting the information group.

  In the gaming machine B6, the gaming machine B7 is provided with an erasing unit for erasing a lottery result by the lottery unit based on selection of the one identification data by the identification information selecting unit.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B6, the lottery result by the lottery means is erased by the erasing means based on the fact that one identification data is selected by the identification information selecting means. There is an effect that the lottery result corresponding to the grant of the game can be prevented from being illegally acquired from the outside.

  In the gaming machine B7, the holding means holds the one identification data until a condition for ending granting the privilege game is satisfied, and the information group selecting means finishes granting the privilege game. A gaming machine B8, wherein the information group is selected based on a condition being met.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are achieved. That is, one identification data is held by the holding means until a condition for ending granting of the bonus game is satisfied. In addition, an information group is selected by the information group selection unit based on the fact that the condition for ending the provision of the bonus game is satisfied.

  Thereby, it can suppress holding a predetermined lottery result for a comparatively long period after grant of privilege game is started until grant of privilege game is ended. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an illegal act of illegally acquiring a predetermined lottery result from the outside while the privilege game is given.

  In any of the gaming machines B3 to B8, the identification data has a data amount smaller than that of the specific number of pieces of information constituting the information group.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B8, since the identification data has a smaller data amount than the specific number of information constituting the information group, the specific number of information is stored in the holding means. Compared with the case where the data is held, the amount of data held in the holding unit can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the holding unit can be reduced.

<Characteristic C group> (Determining whether or not a holding ball can be added depends on whether the most significant bit is 1)
In accordance with a predetermined control procedure, a control means for controlling the game, a first storage means for storing a plurality of predetermined data, and a predetermined data stored in the first storage means are selected. Second storage means for storing a plurality of setting values for performing settings relating to the first data, first selection means for selecting one predetermined data from the first storage means, and predetermined data selected by the first selection means Specific information discriminating means for discriminating whether or not specific information is included in the data, and when the specific information determining means determines that the specific information is included in the one predetermined data A conversion unit that performs predetermined conversion on predetermined data according to a game situation, and the setting value of 1 is selected from the second storage unit based on the first predetermined data that has been subjected to predetermined conversion by the conversion unit. do it Gaming machine C1, characterized in that it comprises a second selecting means for constant.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the game is controlled by the control means according to a predetermined control procedure. A plurality of predetermined data is stored in the first storage means, selected based on the predetermined data stored in the first storage means, and a plurality of setting values for the control means to make settings related to the game are stored in the second storage means. Remembered. The first selection means selects one predetermined data from the first storage means, and the specific information determination means determines whether or not specific information is included in the predetermined data selected by the first selection means. . When it is determined by the specific information determining means that specific information is included in one predetermined data, the conversion means performs a predetermined conversion on the one predetermined data, and the conversion means performs the predetermined conversion. Based on the one predetermined data, one set value is selected and set from the second storage means by the second selection means.

  Thereby, since the conversion means can perform different conversions on one predetermined data according to the game situation, the second selection means can select different setting values according to the conversion contents. Therefore, since the number of predetermined data stored in the first storage unit can be made smaller than the number of set values stored in the second storage unit, the capacity of the first storage unit can be reduced. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine C1, when it is determined by the specific information determining means that the specific information is not included in the predetermined data, the one of the second storage means from the second storage means A gaming machine C2 comprising third selection means for selecting and setting a set value.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, when the specific information determining means determines that the specific information is not included in the predetermined data, the third information is based on the predetermined data. Since one set value is selected and set from the second storage means by the storage means, when one predetermined data not including specific information is selected, conversion by the conversion means can be omitted. . Therefore, there is an effect that processing addition can be reduced when specific information is not included in one predetermined data.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the specific information determining means determines that the specific information is included in the predetermined data when the most significant bit of the predetermined data is 1. A gaming machine C3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, when the most significant bit of 1 predetermined data is 1, specific information is included in the 1 predetermined data by the specific information determining means. Therefore, when determining whether or not specific information is included, it is not necessary to determine the data defined in bits other than the most significant bit, and the determination is performed with simple processing. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the processing load due to the specific information determining means.

  In the gaming machine C3, a dynamic entrance executing means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means based on the entrance of the game sphere into which the game sphere can enter, and the game sphere entering the entrance, The number of times a new game ball has entered with a predetermined value as the upper limit when a new game ball enters the entrance, while the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means And the conversion means sets the most significant bit of the predetermined data of 1 to 0, and adds the count value of the counting means to the predetermined data of 1 Game machine C4.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the game balls entering the entrance where the game balls can enter, and the identification information is dynamically displayed. In the meantime, when a new game ball enters the entrance, the number of times the game ball has newly entered is counted by the counting means with a predetermined value as an upper limit. The most significant bit of 1 predetermined data is set to 0 by the converting means, and the count value of the counting means is added.

  Thereby, a different set value can be selected by the second selection means according to the count value of the counting means. Therefore, since various settings can be realized, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C4, the plurality of setting values stored in the second storage means include at least information related to the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, the plurality of setting values stored in the second storage means include at least the display time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. Therefore, dynamic display can be executed in a manner of dynamic display of various identification information having different display periods. Therefore, there is an effect that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C5, the second selection means selects the set value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information having a shorter display time from the second storage means, as the count value of the count means is larger. A gaming machine C6, which is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C5, the larger the count value of the counting means, the more the setting value corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information having a shorter display time by the second selection means. Since it is selected from the two storage means, it is possible to suppress the continuous dynamic display of identification information having a long display time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being continuously disappointed with a long display time and an effect of being out of play continuously, and to improve the interest of the player in the game. There is an effect that can be.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the game machine includes an information acquisition unit that acquires random information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the first selection unit is based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition unit. The game machine C7 is characterized in that one predetermined data is selected from the first storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are produced. That is, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Then, based on the random information acquired by the information acquisition unit, one predetermined data is selected from the first storage unit by the first selection unit.

  Thereby, since the predetermined data can be given randomness, the set value selected based on the predetermined data can also be given randomness. Therefore, since the game setting is determined at random, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the setting, and there is an effect that unexpectedness can be given to the player.

<Characteristic D group> (variation pattern table is determined based on the design and the rotation speed)
Dynamic display executing means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a combination of a plurality of predetermined identification information in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display executing means A bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when any combination appears, and execution of the dynamic display after the bonus game given by the bonus game granting means is finished Means for counting the number of times that the dynamic display of the identification information has been executed by the means, the dynamic display execution means, the number of times counted by the number of times counting means, The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that a mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined based on information determined when the privilege game is given.

  According to the gaming machine D1, the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display execution means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means in advance When any combination of the determined combinations of identification information appears, a privilege game advantageous to the player is awarded by the privilege game giving means. The number of times that the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information after the bonus game given by the bonus game grant means ends is counted by the number counting means. Based on the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game granting means, the dynamic display mode is determined by the dynamic display executing means. Is done.

  Thereby, various aspects of the dynamic display of the identification information can be determined in accordance with the information determined when the previous award game is given or the number of times counted by the number counting means. Therefore, since it can suppress that the aspect of the dynamic display of identification information becomes monotonous, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1, the dynamic display execution means includes the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means, the specific information based on the identification information that appears when the previous privilege game is given, and the identification information. A game machine that determines a mode of dynamic display of the identification information based on a mode of dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when the display is performed. D2.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D1, the number of times counted by the number counting means, the specific information based on the identification information that appeared when the previous privilege game was awarded, and the identification Since the dynamic display execution means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the dynamic display mode of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means when the information is displayed, the identification Various modes of dynamic display of information can be determined. Therefore, since it can suppress that the aspect of the dynamic display of identification information becomes monotonous, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, an information group composed of a plurality of pieces of information relating to the dynamic display mode of the identification information corresponds to information determined when the previous privilege game is given by the privilege game granting means. A plurality of pieces of information constituting the information group are stored in association with the count value of the number counting unit, and the dynamic display executing unit includes the information group storage unit One information group is selected from the information group storage means based on the number of times counted by the number counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is given by the bonus game grant means A gaming machine D3 that is used to determine a mode of dynamic display of identification information.

  According to the gaming machine D3, an information group composed of a plurality of pieces of information regarding the dynamic display mode of the identification information is associated with information determined when the previous privilege game is granted by the privilege game granting means. Stored by the information group storage means. A plurality of information constituting the information group is stored in association with the count value of the number counting means. Based on the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is awarded by the privilege game granting means, one information group is stored from the information group storage means by the dynamic display executing means. It is selected and used to determine the mode of dynamic display of identification information.

  As a result, the dynamic display execution means can determine the dynamic display mode of the identification information simply by selecting the information group stored in the information group storage means in advance. There is an effect that the processing load of the processing to be determined can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a game entrance is provided for allowing a game ball to enter, and the dynamic display executing means is used as a display means based on the game ball entering the entrance. A gaming machine D4 that dynamically displays identification information.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the dynamic display executing means is based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the entrance where the gaming ball can enter. Since the identification information is dynamically displayed on the display means, the player can easily trigger the dynamic display of the identification information simply by checking whether or not the game ball has entered the entrance. There is an effect that it can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine D4, a plurality of the entrances are provided, and the dynamic display executing unit is configured to determine the type of the entrance into which the game ball has entered and the number of times counted by the number counting unit. And a mode of dynamic display of the identification information based on the information determined when the previous award game is given by the award game granting means. .

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine D4, a plurality of entrances are provided, the type of entrance into which the game ball entered, the number of times counted by the number counting means, and the benefits Since the dynamic display executing means determines the dynamic display mode of the identification information based on the information determined when the previous privilege game is given by the game granting means, the dynamic display of the identification information A wide variety of aspects can be determined. Therefore, since it can suppress that the aspect of the dynamic display of identification information becomes monotonous, there exists an effect that the interest with respect to a player's game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5, after the provision of the bonus game by the bonus game granting unit is completed, the first gaming state or the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state A game state setting means for setting one of the game states, wherein the dynamic display executing means can execute the dynamic display of the identification information in a specific manner when the game state is the second game state; A gaming machine D6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are produced. That is, after the bonus game granting by the bonus game granting unit is completed, the game state setting unit causes the game to be either the first gaming state or the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Set to state. When the gaming state is the second gaming state, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information in a specific manner.

  Accordingly, by confirming whether or not the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific manner, the player can determine whether or not the gaming state is the second gaming state. The mode of dynamic display of information can be carefully observed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine D6, the dynamic display executing means can execute the dynamic display of the identification information in the specific mode when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value. A gaming machine D7.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value, the dynamic display execution means dynamically displays the identification information in a specific manner. Therefore, it can be expected that the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific manner when the count value is a specific value. Therefore, there is an effect that a sharp game can be performed.

  In the gaming machine D7, the dynamic display executing means is different from the specific aspect when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value and the gaming state is the first gaming state. A gaming machine D8 that performs dynamic display of identification information.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D7, when the count value of the number counting means is a specific value and the gaming state is the first gaming state, a specific mode is provided by the dynamic display execution means. Since the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a mode different from the above, it is possible to suppress the dynamic display of the identification information in the specific mode in the first gaming state. Therefore, even though the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a specific manner, the player is distrustful with the gaming machine or the hall because the second gaming state is not advantageous to the player. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D8, the game machine includes an information acquisition unit that acquires random information based on establishment of a specific condition, and the dynamic display execution unit includes the random information acquired by the information acquisition unit The mode of dynamic display of the identification information is determined based on the number of times counted by the number-of-times counting means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is given by the privilege game giving means. A gaming machine D9 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, random information is acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the specific condition, and the acquired random information and the count Based on the number of times counted by the means and the information determined when the previous privilege game is given by the privilege game giving means, the dynamic display mode of the identification information is decided by the dynamic display executing means. Therefore, it is possible to give randomness to the mode of dynamic display of the identification information to be determined. Therefore, since it is possible for the player to make it difficult to predict the mode of the dynamic display of identification information to be executed, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed in a manner that the player does not expect. There is an effect that unexpectedness can be given.

  Each gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and in response to the operation of the operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined game area, and the ball is placed in a winning opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through a prize opening), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Each of the gaming machines is a slot machine, and the gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Each gaming machine is a gaming machine Z3, which is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
110 Main controller (control means)
202 ROM (storage means)
202a first random number table (storage means)
203 RAM (setting value storage means)
S311, S313 Information group selection means, head position designation means

Claims (3)

Control means for controlling the game according to a predetermined control procedure;
Storage means for storing a plurality of information groups constituted by one or a plurality of information for the control means to control;
Information group selection means for selecting one information group used for control by the control means from the storage means;
A head position designating unit that indicates a head position of a predetermined information group in a storage area in which the plurality of information groups are stored;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the information group selecting means selects the one information group based on a head position indicated by the head position specifying means. Of the plurality of information groups stored in the storage means, designation means indicating a head position of an information group stored next to the predetermined information group whose head position is indicated by the head position designation means;
The predetermined information group is composed of the start position of the predetermined information group indicated by the start position specifying means and the start position of the information group stored next to the predetermined information group indicated by the specifying means Information number calculating means for calculating the number of information to be
2. The information group selecting unit selects one information group from a head position specified by the head position specifying unit and the number of information calculated by the information number calculating unit. The gaming machine described. The storage means is composed of a plurality of addresses capable of storing information,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein each of the information constituting the plurality of information groups is stored in the plurality of addresses one by one.

Images